Saturn Automobile 2007 Sky User Guide

2007 Saturn SKY Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This manual describes features that may be  
available in this model, but your vehicle may not  
have all of them. For example, more than one  
entertainment system may be offered or your  
vehicle may have been ordered without a front  
passenger or rear seats.  
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there  
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the  
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.  
SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are  
registered trademarks of Saturn Corporation.  
GENERAL MOTORS and GM are registered  
trademarks and the name SKY is a trademark  
of General Motors Corporation.  
Canadian Owners  
This manual includes the latest information  
at the time it was printed. We reserve the  
right to make changes after that time without  
further notice.  
A French language copy of this manual can be  
obtained from your retailer or from:  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
Litho in U.S.A.  
Part No. 15908067 B Second Printing  
©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Use This Manual  
{CAUTION:  
Many people read the owner manual from  
beginning to end when they first receive their  
new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn  
about the features and controls for the vehicle.  
Pictures and words work together in the owner  
manual to explain things.  
These mean there is something that could  
hurt you or other people.  
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.  
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or  
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.  
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.  
Index  
A good place to quickly locate information about  
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.  
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual  
and the page number where it can be found.  
You will also find a  
circle with a slash  
through it in this book.  
This safety symbol  
means “Do Not,”  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
“Do Not do this” or  
“Do Not let this happen.”  
There are a number of safety cautions in this  
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to  
tell about things that could hurt you if you were  
to ignore the warning.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Damage Warnings  
Vehicle Symbols  
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:  
The vehicle has components and labels that use  
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along  
with the text describing the operation or information  
relating to a specific component, control, message,  
gage, or indicator.  
Notice: These mean there is something  
that could damage your vehicle.  
A notice tells about something that can damage  
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be  
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could  
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help  
avoid the damage.  
If you need help figuring out a specific name of  
a component, gage, or indicator, reference  
the following topics:  
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1  
Features and Controls in Section 2  
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3  
Climate Controls in Section 3  
When you read other manuals, you might see  
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors  
or in different words.  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.  
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.  
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in  
Section 3  
Audio System(s) in Section 3  
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint Systems  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lift the lever located  
under the front of the  
seat to unlock it.  
Front Seats  
Manual Seats  
{CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if  
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat  
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden  
movement could startle and confuse you,  
or make you push a pedal when you do  
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only  
when the vehicle is not moving.  
Slide the seat to where you want it and release  
the lever. Try to move the seat with your body to  
be sure the seat is locked in place.  
Make sure nothing is in front of or under the seat  
to prevent it from releasing or re-locking after  
adjustment.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The switch is located on the outboard side of the  
driver’s seat. To use the adjuster, first move  
the seat to where you want it. See Manual Seats  
on page 8. To raise or lower the seat, hold the  
switch up or down.  
Driver Seat Height Adjuster  
Your vehicle may have a power driver’s seat  
height adjuster.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reclining Seatbacks  
{CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if  
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat  
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden  
movement could startle and confuse you,  
or make you push a pedal when you do  
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only  
when the vehicle is not moving.  
To adjust the seatback, turn the knob on the  
outboard side of the seatback until the seatback  
is in the desired position.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your  
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.  
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts  
cannot do their job when you are reclined  
like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a  
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck  
or other injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a  
crash the belt could go up over your  
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,  
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause  
serious internal injuries.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is  
in motion, have the seatback upright.  
Then sit well back in the seat and wear  
your safety belt properly.  
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle  
is moving.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seatback Latches  
Safety Belts  
The seats have a latch  
located on the outboard  
side near the top of  
the seatback that  
enables the front  
seatback(s) to fold  
forward.  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
This part of the manual tells you how to use  
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things  
you should not do with safety belts.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where he or she  
can not wear a safety belt properly. If you  
are in a crash and you are not wearing a  
safety belt, your injuries can be much  
worse. You can hit things inside the  
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be  
seriously injured or killed. In the same  
crash, you might not be if you are buckled  
up. Always fasten your safety belt, and  
check that your passenger’s belt is  
fastened properly too.  
This allows access to the map pocket on the rear  
of the seatback.  
To fold the seatback forward, lift the latch and  
push the seatback forward.  
{CAUTION:  
If the seatback is not locked, it could  
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.  
That could cause injury to the person  
sitting there. Always push and pull on the  
seatback to be sure it is locked.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,  
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is  
why: They work.  
{CAUTION:  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you  
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a  
bad one.  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a  
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.  
In a collision, people riding in these areas  
are more likely to be seriously injured or  
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not equipped  
with seats and safety belts. Be sure  
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  
and using a safety belt properly.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can  
be so serious that even buckled up, a person  
would not survive. But most crashes are in  
between. In many of them, people who buckle up  
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without  
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.  
After more than 40 years of safety belts in  
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes  
buckling up does matter... a lot!  
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and  
your passenger to buckle your safety belts.  
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 129  
on page 130.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast  
as it goes.  
Put someone on it.  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a  
seat on wheels.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.  
The rider does not stop.  
The person keeps going until stopped by  
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the  
windshield...  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or the instrument panel...  
or the safety belts!  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle  
does. You get more time to stop. You stop  
over more distance, and your strongest bones  
take the forces. That is why safety belts  
make such good sense.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About  
Safety Belts  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far  
from home, why should I wear safety belts?  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are  
in an accident — even one that is not your  
fault — you and your passenger can be hurt.  
Being a good driver does not protect you  
from things beyond your control, such as  
bad drivers.  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an  
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a  
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a  
safety belt, even if you are upside down.  
And your chance of being conscious during  
and after an accident, so you can unbuckle  
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)  
of home. And the greatest number of  
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds  
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should  
I have to wear safety belts?  
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so  
they work with safety belts — not instead of  
them. Every airbag system ever offered  
for sale has required the use of safety belts.  
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,  
you still have to buckle up to get the most  
protection. That is true not only in frontal  
collisions, but especially in side and other  
collisions.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
This part is only for people of adult size.  
Be aware that there are special things to know  
about safety belts and children. And there  
are different rules for smaller children and babies.  
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see  
Children on page 30. Follow those rules for  
everyone’s protection.  
First, you will want to know which restraint  
systems your vehicle has.  
We will start with the driver position.  
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across  
you. Do not let it get twisted.  
Driver Position  
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the  
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,  
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.  
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how  
to wear it properly.  
1. Close and lock the door.  
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.  
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until  
it clicks.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is  
secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 27.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the  
safety belt through the latch plate to fully  
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder  
and across the chest. These parts of the body are  
best able to take belt restraining forces.  
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop  
or crash.  
The lap part of the belt should be worn low  
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.  
In a crash, this applies force to the strong  
pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to  
slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the  
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This  
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder  
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would  
move forward too much, which could  
increase injury. The shoulder belt should  
fit against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give  
nearly as much protection this way.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt  
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide  
under the lap belt and apply force at your  
abdomen. This could cause serious or  
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should  
be worn low and snug on the hips, just  
touching the thighs.  
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly  
as much protection this way.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is  
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a  
crash, the belt would go up over your  
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,  
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause  
serious internal injuries. Always buckle  
your belt into the buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear  
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a  
crash, your body would move too far  
forward, which would increase the chance  
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt  
would apply too much force to the ribs,  
which are not as strong as shoulder  
bones. You could also severely injure  
internal organs like your liver or spleen.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.  
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted  
belt. In a crash, you would not have the  
full width of the belt to spread impact  
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight  
so it can work properly, or ask your  
retailer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely  
to be seriously injured if they do not wear  
safety belts.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should go back out of the way.  
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out  
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can  
damage both the belt and your vehicle.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder  
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low  
as possible, below the rounding, throughout  
the pregnancy.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it  
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt  
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,  
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing  
them properly.  
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in  
a crash, you will need to get new ones, and  
probably other new parts for your safety belt  
After a Crash on page 57.  
Safety Belt Extender  
Passenger Position  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,  
you should use it.  
To learn how to wear the passenger’s safety belt  
properly, see Driver Position on page 18.  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer  
will order you an extender. When you go in to  
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so  
the extender will be long enough for you. To  
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else  
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to  
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.  
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear  
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more  
information, see the instruction sheet that comes  
with the extender.  
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way  
as the driver’s safety belt — except for one  
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the  
belt out all the way, you will engage the child  
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let  
the belt go back all the way and start again.  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the  
driver and right front passenger. Although you  
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt  
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during  
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal  
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for  
pretensioner activation are met.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?  
Child Restraints  
A: If possible, an older child should wear a  
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional  
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The  
shoulder belt should not cross the face  
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below  
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.  
It should never be worn over the abdomen,  
which could cause severe or even fatal internal  
injuries in a crash.  
Older Children  
According to accident statistics, children are safer  
when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can  
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be  
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need  
to use safety belts properly.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats  
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder  
belt, but the child is so small that the  
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s  
face or neck?  
A: Move the child toward the center of the  
vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still  
is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash  
the child’s upper body would have the restraint  
that belts provide.  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here two children are wearing the same  
belt. The belt can not properly spread the  
impact forces. In a crash, the two children  
can be crushed together and seriously  
injured. A belt must be used by only  
one person at a time.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and  
snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.  
This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones  
in a crash.  
Infants and Young Children  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This  
includes infants and all other children. Neither the  
distance traveled nor the age and size of the  
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use  
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state  
in the United States and in every Canadian  
province says children up to some age must be  
restrained while in a vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is  
behind the child. If the child wears the belt  
in this way, in a crash the child might slide  
under the belt. The belt’s force would then  
be applied right on the child’s abdomen.  
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.  
Children can be seriously injured or  
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped  
around their neck and the safety belt  
continues to tighten. Never leave children  
unattended in a vehicle and never allow  
children to play with the safety belts.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Every time infants and young children ride in  
vehicles, they should have the protection provided  
by appropriate restraints. Young children should  
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,  
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they  
need to use a child restraint.  
{CAUTION:  
People should never hold a baby in their  
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby  
does not weigh much — until a crash.  
During a crash a baby will become so  
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For  
example, in a crash at only 25 mph  
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will  
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force  
on a person’s arms. A baby should be  
secured in an appropriate restraint.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on  
child restraints?  
{CAUTION:  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased  
by the vehicle’s owner, are available in  
four basic types. Selection of a particular  
restraint should take into consideration  
not only the child’s weight, height, and age  
but also whether or not the restraint will  
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which  
it will be used.  
Children who are up against, or very  
close to, any airbag when it inflates can  
be seriously injured or killed. Airbags  
plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection  
for adults and older children, but  
not for young children and infants.  
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system  
nor its airbag system is designed for  
them. Young children and infants need  
the protection that a child restraint  
system can provide.  
For most basic types of child restraints, there  
are many different models available. When  
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is  
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,  
the restraint will have a label saying that it  
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions  
that come with the restraint state the weight  
and height limitations for a particular child  
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds  
of restraints available for children with  
special needs.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Newborn infants need complete support,  
including support for the head and neck.  
This is necessary because a newborn  
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs  
so much compared with the rest of its  
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing  
seat settles into the restraint, so the  
crash forces can be distributed across  
the strongest part of an infant’s body,  
the back and shoulders. Infants always  
should be secured in appropriate infant  
restraints.  
The body structure of a young child is  
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,  
for whom the safety belts are designed.  
A young child’s hip bones are still so  
small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt  
may not remain low on the hip bones, as  
it should. Instead, it may settle up around  
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt  
would apply force on a body area that is  
unprotected by any bony structure. This  
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.  
Young children always should be secured  
in appropriate child restraints.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint  
with the seating surface against the back of the  
infant. The harness system holds the infant  
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant  
positioned in the restraint.  
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use  
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system  
designed to restrain or position a child on a  
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s  
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint  
for the child’s body with the harness and also  
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped  
or shelf-like shields.  
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed  
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt  
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt  
positioner, and some high-back booster seats  
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also  
help a child to see out the window.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint  
in the Vehicle  
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?  
A: A child restraint system is any device designed  
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,  
or position children. A built-in child restraint  
system is a permanent part of the motor  
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a  
portable one, which is purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an  
add-on child restraint must be secured in  
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child  
restraints, the child has to be secured within  
the child restraint.  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed  
in a crash if the child restraint is not  
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure  
the child restraint is properly installed in  
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt,  
following the instructions that came with  
that restraint, and also the instructions in  
this manual.  
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be  
sure the child restraint is designed to be  
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label  
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle  
safety standards. Then follow the instructions  
for the restraint. You may find these  
instructions on the restraint itself or in a  
booklet, or both.  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child  
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child  
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats  
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder  
belt. A child can be endangered in a crash if the  
child restraint is not properly secured in the  
vehicle.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer  
to the instructions that come with the restraint  
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,  
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint  
instructions are important, so if they are not  
available, obtain a replacement copy from the  
manufacturer.  
A shield may take the place of hip straps. A  
T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are  
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the  
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield  
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like  
shield that swings up or to the side.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and  
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly  
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even  
when no child is in it.  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed  
in a crash if the child is not properly  
secured in the child restraint. Make sure  
the child is properly secured, following  
the instructions that came with that  
restraint.  
Securing the Child Within the  
Child Restraint  
There are several systems for securing the child  
within the child restraint. One system, the  
three-point harness, has straps that come down  
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle  
together at the crotch. The five-point harness  
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,  
and a crotch strap.  
Because there are different systems, it is important  
to refer to the instructions that come with the  
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash  
if the child is not properly secured in the child  
restraint.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You must use the safety belts to secure your child  
restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or  
local law requires that the top tether be anchored.  
Refer to your child restraint instructions and  
instructions in this manual for securing a child  
restraint using the vehicle’s safety belts.  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
Some child restraints have a LATCH system.  
As part of the LATCH system, your child restraint  
may have lower attachments and/or a top  
tether. The LATCH system can help hold the  
child restraint in place during driving or in a crash.  
Some vehicles have lower and/or top tether  
anchors designed to secure a child restraint with  
lower attachments and/or a top tether.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Passenger Seat Position  
Your vehicle has a passenger’s airbag. In addition,  
your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to  
turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag when  
an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small  
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster  
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing  
Indicator on page 131 for more information on  
this including important safety information.  
Some child restraints with a top tether are  
designed to be used whether the top tether is  
anchored or not. Other child restraints require that  
the top tether be anchored. A national or local  
law may require that the top tether be anchored.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing  
child restraints have a top tether, and that  
the tether be attached.  
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or  
top tether anchors to secure a child restraint  
with the LATCH system. If a national or local  
law requires that your top tether be anchored, do  
not use a child restraint in this vehicle because  
a top tether cannot be properly anchored.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
We recommend that rear-facing child  
restraints be transported in vehicles  
with a rear seat that will accommodate  
a rear-facing child restraint, whenever  
possible.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint  
can be seriously injured or killed if the  
right front passenger’s airbag inflates.  
This is because the back of the rear  
facing child restraint would be very close  
to the inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag  
is off before using a rear-facing child  
restraint in the passenger’s position.  
There is no top strap anchor in your vehicle.  
Do not secure a child seat in your vehicle  
if a national or local law requires that the top  
strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top strap  
must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and  
more information.  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system  
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no  
system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will  
If you need to secure a forward-facing child  
restraint in the passenger’s position, move the  
seat as far back as it will go before securing the  
forward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seats  
on page 8.  
not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure  
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow  
the instructions that came with the child restraint.  
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as  
the instructions say.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and  
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt  
through or around the restraint. The child  
restraint instructions will show you how.  
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s frontal airbag.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 50.  
We recommend that rear-facing child  
restraints not be transported in your vehicle,  
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint  
is forward-facing, move the seat as far  
back as it will go before securing the child  
restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats  
on page 8.  
When the passenger sensing system has  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the  
off indicator in the passenger airbag status  
indicator should light and stay lit when  
the vehicle is started. See Passenger  
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button  
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way  
out of the retractor to set the lock.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child  
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt  
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and  
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.  
If you are using a forward-facing child  
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your  
knee to push down on the child restraint  
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able  
to pull more of the belt from the retractor  
once the lock has been set.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
A thick layer of additional material such as a  
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat  
covers, seat heaters and seat massagers, located  
between the seat cushion and the child restraint  
or small occupant, can affect how the passenger  
sensing system operates. Remove any additional  
material from the seat cushion before reinstalling  
or securing the child restraint and before a  
small occupant, including a small adult, sits in  
the passenger position.  
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the  
instrument panel will be lit and stay lit  
when the vehicle is started.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove  
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall  
the child restraint.  
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to  
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not  
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.  
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s  
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.  
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child  
restraint in this vehicle and check with your retailer.  
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the  
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.  
The safety belt will move freely again and be  
ready to work for an adult or larger child  
passenger.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Airbag System  
Your vehicle has an airbag for the driver and an  
airbag for the right front passenger.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to  
the safety belts. All airbags are designed  
to work with safety belts, but do not  
replace them.  
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s  
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk  
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all  
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.  
Here are the most important things to know about  
the airbag system:  
{CAUTION:  
Airbags are designed to deploy in  
{CAUTION:  
moderate to severe frontal and near  
frontal crashes. They are not designed to  
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many  
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained  
occupants, airbags may provide less  
protection in frontal crashes than more  
forceful airbags have provided in the past.  
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a  
safety belt properly — whether or not  
there is an airbag for that person.  
You can be severely injured or killed in a  
crash if you are not wearing your safety  
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing  
your safety belt during a crash helps  
reduce your chance of hitting things  
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Airbags inflate with great force, faster  
than the blink of an eye. If you are too  
close to an inflating airbag, as you would  
be if you were leaning forward, it could  
seriously injure you. Safety belts help  
keep you in position before and during a  
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even  
with airbags. The driver should sit as far  
back as possible while still maintaining  
control of the vehicle.  
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously  
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder  
belts offer the best protection for adults,  
but not for young children and infants.  
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor  
its airbag system is designed for them.  
Young children and infants need the  
protection that a child restraint system can  
provide. Always secure children properly  
in your vehicle. To read how, see Older  
Children on page 30.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is an airbag  
readiness light on the  
instrument panel cluster,  
which shows the  
Where Are the Airbags?  
airbag symbol.  
The system checks the airbag electrical system  
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is  
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 130 for more information.  
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering  
wheel.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
If something is between an occupant  
and an airbag, the bag might not inflate  
properly or it might force the object into  
that person causing severe injury or even  
death. The path of an inflating airbag  
must be kept clear. Do not put anything  
between an occupant and an airbag,  
and do not attach or put anything on the  
steering wheel hub or on or near any  
other airbag covering.  
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a  
full deployment is about 18 to 22 mph (28.9 to  
35.4 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,  
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be  
somewhat above or below this range.  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
Airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to  
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are  
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a  
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment  
thresholds take into account a variety of desired  
deployment and non-deployment events and  
are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to  
be in time for the airbags to inflate and help  
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal  
airbags will or should deploy is not based on how  
fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely  
on what you hit, the direction of the impact,  
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash  
speeds. For example:  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash  
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that  
does not deform.  
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal  
airbags, which adjust the restraint according  
to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic  
frontal sensors, which help the sensing system  
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact  
and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate  
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less  
than full deployment. For more severe frontal  
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of  
your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does  
not move or deform, the threshold level for  
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),  
the airbags could inflate at a different crash  
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object  
(like a wall).  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,  
the airbags could inflate at a different crash  
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into  
the object.  
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during  
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many  
side impacts.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In any particular crash, no one can say whether  
an airbag should have inflated simply because  
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what  
the repair costs were. Inflation is determined  
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact,  
and how quickly the vehicle slows down.  
But airbags would not help you in many types  
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,  
and many side impacts, primarily because  
an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.  
Airbags should never be regarded as anything  
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then  
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal  
collisions.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag  
sensing system detects that the vehicle is  
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release  
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the  
airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardware  
are all part of the airbag modules inside the  
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in  
front of the right front passenger.  
What Will You See After an  
Airbag Inflates?  
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so  
quickly that some people may not even realize  
the airbag inflated. Some components of the  
airbag module — the steering wheel hub for the  
driver’s airbag or the instrument panel for the  
right front passenger’s airbag — may be hot for a  
short time. The parts of the airbag that come  
into contact with you may be warm, but not too  
hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust  
coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.  
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from  
seeing out of the windshield or being able to  
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from  
leaving the vehicle.  
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal  
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the  
steering wheel or the instrument panel. The  
airbag supplements the protection provided by  
safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of  
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper  
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an  
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle  
deformation. Additional windshield breakage  
may also occur from the right front passenger  
airbag.  
{CAUTION:  
When an airbag inflates, there may be  
dust in the air. This dust could cause  
breathing problems for people with a  
history of asthma or other breathing  
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the  
vehicle should get out as soon as it is  
safe to do so. If you have breathing  
problems but cannot get out of the  
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get  
fresh air by opening a window or a door.  
If you experience breathing problems  
following an airbag deployment, you  
should seek medical attention.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once.  
After they inflate, you will need some new  
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get  
them, the airbag system will not be there  
to help protect you in another crash. A new  
system will include airbag modules and  
possibly other parts. The service manual  
for your vehicle covers the need to replace  
other parts.  
Your vehicle has a crash sensing and  
diagnostic module which records information  
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection  
Let only qualified technicians work on the  
airbag system. Improper service can mean  
that an airbag system will not work properly.  
See your retailer for service.  
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically  
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,  
and turn the hazard warning flashers on when  
the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors again,  
turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazard  
warning flashers off by using the controls for  
those features.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system will turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.  
The driver’s airbag is not part of the passenger  
sensing system.  
Passenger Sensing System  
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.  
The passenger airbag status indicator will be  
visible when you turn your ignition key to  
RUN or START.  
The passenger sensing system works with  
sensors that are part of the passenger’s seat.  
The sensors are designed to detect the presence  
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if  
the passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled  
(may inflate) or not.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer  
if they are restrained in the rear rather than  
the front seat. We recommend that rear-facing  
child restraints not be transported in your vehicle,  
even if the airbag is off.  
United States  
Canada  
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on  
and off, will be visible on the instrument panel  
during the system check. When the system check  
is complete, either the word ON or the word  
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will  
on page 131.  
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint  
in the right front passenger seat unless the  
passenger airbag status indicator shows off  
and the airbag is off. Here is why:  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
If you need to secure a forward-facing  
child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat  
as far back as it will go. It is better to  
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off  
before using a rear-facing child restraint  
in the right front seat position.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to  
turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if:  
The passenger seat is unoccupied.  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system  
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no  
system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be  
transported in vehicles with a rear seat  
that will accommodate a rear-facing child  
restraint, whenever possible.  
The system determines that an infant is  
present in a rear-facing infant seat.  
The system determines that a small child is  
present in a forward-facing child restraint.  
The system determines that a small child is  
present in a booster seat.  
A passenger takes his/her weight off of the  
seat for a period of time.  
The passenger seat is occupied by a smaller  
person, such as a child who has outgrown  
child restraints.  
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator  
in the instrument panel will light and stay lit to  
remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed  
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light  
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.  
For some children who have outgrown child  
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger  
sensing system may or may not turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon the  
person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone  
in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints  
should wear a safety belt properly — whether  
or not there is an airbag for that person.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child  
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child  
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s  
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint  
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to  
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not  
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.  
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s  
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the  
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it  
could be because that person is not sitting properly  
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off  
and ask the person to place the seatback in  
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the  
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the  
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the  
vehicle and have the person remain in this position  
for about two minutes. This will allow the system  
to detect that person and then enable the  
passenger’s airbag.  
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child  
restraint in this vehicle and check with your retailer.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to  
enable (may inflate) the passenger’s frontal airbag  
anytime the system senses that a person of adult  
size is sitting properly in the passenger’s seat.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
If this ever happens, have the vehicle  
serviced promptly, because an adult-size  
person sitting in the right front passenger’s  
seat may not have the protection of the  
frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 130 for more on this, including  
important safety information.  
A thick layer of additional material such as a  
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat  
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers  
can affect how well the passenger sensing system  
operates. Remove any additional material from  
the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing  
the child restraint and before a small occupant,  
including a small adult, sits in the passenger  
position. You may want to consider not using  
seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if  
your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
Vehicle on page 55 for more information about  
modifications that can affect how the system  
operates.  
{CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light in the  
instrument panel cluster ever comes on  
and stays on, it means that something  
may be wrong with the airbag system.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be  
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system  
in several places around your vehicle. You do not  
want the system to inflate while someone is  
working on your vehicle. Your retailer and the  
service manual have information about servicing  
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase  
a service manual, see Service Publications  
Ordering Information on page 369.  
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is  
turned off and the battery is disconnected,  
an airbag can still inflate during improper  
service. You can be injured if you are  
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid  
yellow connectors. They are probably part  
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow  
proper service procedures, and make sure  
the person performing work for you is  
qualified to do so.  
The airbag system does not need regular  
maintenance.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get  
my vehicle modified. How can I find out  
whether this will affect my airbag system?  
A: Changing or moving any parts of the  
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing  
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,  
the instrument panel, or airbag wiring can  
affect the operation of the airbag system.  
If you have questions, call Customer  
Assistance. The phone numbers and  
addresses for Customer Assistance are in  
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction  
Procedure in this manual. See Customer  
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front  
of the vehicle that could keep the airbags  
from working properly?  
A: Yes. If you add things that change your  
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,  
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep  
the airbag system from working properly.  
Also, the airbag system may not work properly  
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors.  
If you have any questions about this,  
you should contact Customer Assistance  
before you modify your vehicle. The phone  
numbers and addresses for Customer  
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,  
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag  
system does not need regular maintenance.  
Restraint System Check  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Notice: If you damage the covering for the  
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,  
the airbag may not work properly. You may  
have to replace the airbag module in the  
steering wheel or both the airbag module  
and the instrument panel for the right front  
passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break  
the airbag coverings.  
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder  
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,  
retractors and anchorages are working properly.  
Look for any other loose or damaged safety  
belt system parts. If you see anything that might  
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have  
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 318  
for more information.  
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in  
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.  
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision  
damage also may mean you will need to have  
safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New  
parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt  
was not being used at the time of the collision.  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
{CAUTION:  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system  
earlier in this section.  
A crash can damage the restraint systems  
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint  
system may not properly protect the  
person using it, resulting in serious injury  
or even death in a crash. To help make  
sure your restraint systems are working  
properly after a crash, have them inspected  
and any necessary replacements made as  
soon as possible.  
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to  
replace the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt  
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new  
retractor assembly will be there to help protect you  
in a collision.  
After a crash you may need to replace the driver  
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor  
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not  
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety  
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt  
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners  
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if  
your airbag readiness light stays on after you start  
your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag  
Readiness Light on page 130.  
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?  
After a very minor collision, nothing may be  
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they  
would be if worn during a more severe crash,  
then you need new parts.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 75  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 75  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
ignition key is dangerous for many  
reasons. They could operate the power  
windows or other controls or even make  
the vehicle move. The children or others  
could be badly injured or even killed.  
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with  
children.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One key works all  
of the lock cylinders  
on the vehicle.  
If a replacement key or any additional key is  
needed, you must purchase it from your retailer.  
The key will have 1 stamped on it. Keep the  
bar code tag that came with the original keys.  
Give this tag to your retailer if you need a  
new key made.  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your  
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle  
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.  
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.  
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 359.  
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle  
Theft-Deterrent System. The key has a  
transponder in the key head that matches a  
decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other  
than an authorized service facility could void  
authorization to use this equipment.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System  
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry  
Canada.  
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This  
is normal for any remote keyless entry system.  
If the transmitter does not work or if you have to  
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter  
to work, try this:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
Check the distance. You may be too far from  
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer  
during rainy or snowy weather.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects  
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps  
to the left or right, hold the transmitter  
higher, and try again.  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
Check to determine if battery replacement is  
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”  
Operation on page 63.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
If you are still having trouble, see your retailer  
or a qualified technician for service.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time  
to unlock the driver’s door. Press the unlock button  
again within five seconds to unlock the other  
door. The interior lamps will come on and stay on  
for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.  
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will  
flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.  
See “UNLOCK HORN” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 152.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation  
The vehicle’s doors  
can be locked and  
unlocked, and the trunk  
can be unlatched  
from about 3 feet (1 m)  
up to 60 feet (18 m)  
away with the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter.  
V(Trunk Release): Press and hold this  
button for approximately one second to release  
the trunk lid. The trunk release will only work if  
the ignition is off or the vehicle speed is less  
than 2 mph (3 k/h).  
Q(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the  
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), the parking lamps may flash  
once and the horn may chirp to indicate  
locking has occurred. See “LOCK HORN” under  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and  
release this button to help locate your vehicle.  
The horn will sound three times and the hazard  
lamps will flash three times. Press and hold  
the button for three seconds to sound the panic  
alarm. The horn will sound and the hazard  
lamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition must  
be off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm to  
work. Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm button  
again or turn the ignition to ACC or RUN to  
turn off the alarm.  
Matching Transmitter(s) to  
Your Vehicle  
Each RKE transmitter is uniquely coded to prevent  
another transmitter from unlocking the vehicle.  
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can  
be purchased through your retailer. Remember  
to bring any additional transmitters so they  
can also be re-coded to match the new transmitter.  
Once your retailer has coded the new transmitter,  
the lost transmitter cannot unlock the vehicle.  
The vehicle can have a maximum of four  
transmitters coded to it.  
The vehicle may have Remote Lock/Unlock  
Confirmation. This feature provides feedback that  
a command has been received by the vehicle.  
The parking lamps will flash and the horn  
may sound briefly. See “LOCK HORN”  
and “UNLOCK HORN” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 152 for programming  
information.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Replacement  
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE  
transmitter should last about four years.  
If the battery is weak the transmitter will not work  
within its normal range. It is probably time to  
change the battery if you have to be very close  
to the vehicle before the transmitter works.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, use  
care not to touch any of the circuitry.  
Static from your body transferred to these  
surfaces may damage the transmitter.  
To replace the battery, do the following:  
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the  
notch, located below the trunk release  
button, and pry the front and back apart.  
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a  
metal object to do this.  
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with  
the positive side of the battery facing up. Use  
a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.  
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter  
together.  
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with  
the vehicle.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and Locks  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Manual Door Locks  
Young children who get into unlocked  
vehicles may be unable to get out.  
A child can be overcome by extreme  
heat and can suffer permanent injuries  
or even death from heat stroke.  
Always lock your vehicle whenever  
you leave it.  
{CAUTION:  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
Passengers, especially children,  
can easily open the doors and fall out  
of a moving vehicle. When a door is  
locked, the handle will not open it.  
You increase the chance of being  
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash  
if the doors are not locked. So, wear  
safety belts properly and lock the  
doors whenever you drive.  
Outsiders can easily enter through  
an unlocked door when you slow  
down or stop your vehicle. Locking  
your doors can help prevent this  
from happening.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There are a couple of ways to lock and unlock  
your vehicle manually.  
Delayed Locking  
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have  
the delayed locking feature. This feature delays the  
actual locking of the doors when the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to lock the  
vehicle.  
From inside the vehicle,  
use the manual door  
lock knob. Pull up or  
down on the knob to  
unlock or lock the door.  
If any door is open when locking the vehicle using  
the RKE transmitter, three chimes will sound  
signaling that the delayed locking feature is active.  
Five seconds after the last door is closed, both  
doors will lock and the parking lamps will flash.  
To cancel the delay and lock the doors immediately,  
press the lock button on the RKE a second time.  
To lock either door from the outside, turn the key  
toward the rear of the vehicle. To unlock the  
door, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle.  
If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not  
lock the doors.  
Power Door Locks  
Your vehicle is programmed from the factory with  
this feature turned off. To turn the feature on,  
you must go through the Driver Information  
on page 152.  
You can use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter to lock and unlock the doors from inside  
or outside the vehicle. See Remote Keyless  
more information.  
The power door lock switches are located on the  
driver’s and passenger’s door.  
Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.  
Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The automatic unlock feature can be disabled or  
programmed in different ways if the vehicle has  
an automatic transmission. See DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 152 for more information.  
Automatic Door Lock  
If your vehicle has power door locks, the doors will  
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved  
out of PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatic  
transmission. For a vehicle with a manual  
transmission, the speed must be greater than  
5 mph (8 km/h).  
Trunk  
To release the trunk lid use either the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or see “Remote  
Trunk Release” following.  
The automatic door locking feature cannot be  
disabled.  
Automatic Door Unlock  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission and  
power door locks, the doors with automatically  
unlock when the shift lever is moved into  
PARK (P).  
It can be dangerous to drive with  
the trunk lid open because carbon  
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your  
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.  
If your vehicle has a manual transmission and  
power door locks, the doors will automatically  
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Trunk Release  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
To open the trunk from  
inside the vehicle, press  
the remote trunk  
release button located  
in the glovebox.  
It can cause unconsciousness and even  
death. If you must drive with the trunk  
lid open or if electrical wiring or other  
cable connections must pass through  
the seal between the body and the  
trunk lid:  
Make sure all other windows are shut.  
Turn the fan on your heating or  
cooling system to its highest speed  
and select the control setting that will  
force outside air into your vehicle.  
See Climate Control System.  
If you have air outlets on or under  
the instrument panel, open them all  
the way.  
The remote trunk release will only work when  
either the ignition is off or in ACC, the parking  
brake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less  
than 2 mph (3 km/h).  
See Engine Exhaust on page 91.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk  
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point  
when securing items in the trunk as it  
Emergency Trunk Release Handle  
could damage the handle. The emergency  
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a  
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling  
them to open the trunk from the inside.  
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk  
release handle located inside the trunk on  
the driver’s side. This handle will glow following  
exposure to light. If someone is locked in the trunk,  
they can pull the release handle and push the  
trunk lid open from the inside to open the trunk.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets  
in a vehicle with the windows closed is  
dangerous. They can be overcome by the  
extreme heat and suffer permanent  
injuries or even death from heat stroke.  
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a  
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the  
windows closed in warm or hot weather.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Down Window  
Power Windows  
The driver’s window has an express-down feature  
which allows the window to be lowered fully without  
pressing and holding the switch. Press the front of  
the switch to the first position, and the window will  
open a small amount. Press the switch down fully  
and the window will go all the way down.  
If your vehicle has  
power windows, the  
switches on the driver’s  
door armrest control  
both windows.  
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the  
front of the switch up.  
Sun Visors  
To use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visor  
nearest to the windshield toward you.  
In addition, the passenger’s door has a window  
switch that controls that window. Press the front of  
the switch to open the window. Pull the switch  
up to close it.  
Visor Vanity Mirror  
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity  
mirror. Swing down the sun visor and slide the  
cover to expose the mirror.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arming the System  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some  
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of  
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we  
put on it can make it impossible to steal.  
While the ignition is off, press the remote keyless  
entry transmitter lock button, to arm the system.  
The system will arm after either of these  
things occur:  
Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.  
Sixty seconds with any door open.  
Content Theft-Deterrent  
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent  
alarm system.  
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a  
second time while all the doors are closed,  
the system will arm immediately. The system arms  
in 60 seconds if a door is open, or after the  
open door is closed.  
The security light,  
located on the  
instrument panel cluster,  
will turn on to indicate  
that arming has  
If you do not want to arm the system, lock the car  
with the manual door lock knobs.  
been initiated.  
Disarming the System  
You can disarm the system by doing any one of  
the following:  
Once the system is armed, the security light will  
flash once every three seconds.  
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless  
entry transmitter.  
If the security light is flashing twice per second,  
this means that a door is open.  
Turn the ignition on.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened  
using the trunk release button on the transmitter,  
the system will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm  
when the trunk has been closed. This allows you to  
exit the vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter,  
or open the trunk using the transmitter without  
having to disarm and re-arm the system.  
How to Turn Off the System Alarm  
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the  
following:  
Press the lock button on the remote keyless  
entry transmitter. The system will then  
re-arm itself.  
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless  
entry transmitter. This will also disarm the  
system.  
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will  
stop flashing.  
How the System Alarm is Activated  
Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.  
This will also disarm the system.  
If the system is armed, it can be activated by:  
Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This causes  
a ten second pre-alarm chirping noise followed  
by the horn sounding and lights flashing for  
30 seconds.  
How to Detect a Tamper Condition  
If you hear three chirps when you press the  
unlock, lock, or trunk release buttons on the  
remote keyless transmitter, it means that  
the content theft security system alarm was  
activated previously.  
Opening a passenger’s door. This immediately  
causes a full alarm of the horn sounding and  
lights flashing for 30 seconds.  
After the 30 second alarm ends, the system will  
re-arm itself.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PASS-Key® III+  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation  
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry  
Canada.  
Your vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+  
(Personalized Automotive Security System)  
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a  
passive theft-deterrent system. This means you do  
not have to do anything special to arm or disarm  
the system. It works when you insert or remove the  
key from the ignition.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful  
interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that  
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the  
vehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error  
method to start the vehicle will be discouraged  
because of the high number of electrical key codes.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
If the engine does not start and the security light  
on the instrument panel cluster comes on  
when trying to start the vehicle, the key may have  
a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off  
and try again.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other  
than an authorized service facility could void  
authorization to use this equipment.  
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder  
in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the engine still does not start, and the key does  
not appear to be damaged, try another ignition key.  
At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,  
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 325.  
If the engine still does not start with the other key,  
your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does  
start, the first key may be faulty. See your retailer  
who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new  
key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside  
on page 359.  
To program the new key do the following:  
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.  
2. Insert the already programmed key in the  
ignition and start the engine. If the engine  
will not start, see your retailer for service.  
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to  
LOCK, and remove the key.  
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to  
the RUN position within five seconds of the  
original key being turned to LOCK.  
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder  
to “learn” the transponder value of a new or  
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be  
programmed for the vehicle. The following  
procedure is for programming additional keys  
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost  
or do not operate, you must see your retailer or  
a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to  
have keys made and programmed to the system.  
5. The security light will turn off once the key  
has been programmed.  
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys  
are to be programmed.  
If you are ever driving and the security light comes  
on and stays on, you may be able to restart  
your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+  
system, however, is not working properly and  
must be serviced by your retailer. Your vehicle is  
not protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system  
at this time.  
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,  
see your retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.  
See your retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is  
cut exactly as the ignition key that operates  
the system.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If these break-in procedures are not followed,  
the vehicle’s engine, axle, or other parts  
could be damaged.  
Starting and Operating  
Your Vehicle  
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles  
(322 km) or so. During this time your new  
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops  
with new linings can mean premature wear  
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in  
guideline every time you get new brake  
linings.  
New Vehicle Break-In  
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an  
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better  
in the long run if you follow these guidelines  
for the first 500 miles (805 km):  
Do not drive at any one constant speed,  
fast or slow.  
Following break-in, engine speed and load  
can be gradually increased.  
Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).  
Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain  
from using the full throttle while driving.  
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,  
the vehicle.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9(LOCK): This position locks your steering  
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only  
be able to remove your key when the ignition is  
turned to LOCK.  
Ignition Positions  
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn  
it to four different positions.  
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition  
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the  
shift lever is in PARK (P).  
If you have a manual transmission, the ignition  
switch can be turned to LOCK in any shift  
lever position.  
{CAUTION:  
If you have a manual transmission  
removing the key from the ignition switch  
will lock the steering column and result  
in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.  
This could cause a collision. If you need  
to turn the engine off while the vehicle  
is moving, turn the key to ACC.  
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the  
ignition switch could cause damage or break  
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key  
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the  
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and  
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this  
works, then your vehicle needs service.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates  
some of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the  
steering wheel and ignition.  
Key In the Ignition  
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside,  
as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves.  
If you leave the key in the ignition and park your  
vehicle, a chime will sound, when you open  
the driver’s door. Always remember to remove  
your key from the ignition and take it with you.  
This will lock your ignition and transaxle.  
R(RUN): This is the position the switch returns  
to after you start your engine and release the  
switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine  
is running. But even when the engine is not  
running, you can use RUN to operate your  
electrical accessories and to display some warning  
and indicator lights.  
Also, always remember to lock the doors.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the key  
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may  
not be able to start your vehicle after it has been  
parked for an extended period of time.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the key  
in the ACC or RUN position with the engine  
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if  
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended  
period of time.  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio  
and power windows to continue to work up  
to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.  
/(START): This position starts the engine.  
When the engine starts, release the key.  
The ignition switch will return to RUN for normal  
driving.  
Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition  
key is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned off,  
the radio and power windows will continue to  
work for up to 10 minutes or until any door  
is opened.  
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s  
door while in LOCK or ACC, when the key has  
not been removed from the ignition.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting Procedure  
Starting the Engine  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn  
the ignition key to START. When the engine  
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go  
down as your engine gets warm. Do not  
race the engine immediately after starting it.  
Operate the engine and transmission gently to  
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all  
moving parts.  
Place the transmission in the proper gear.  
Automatic Transmission  
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or  
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in  
any other position -- this is a safety feature.  
To restart when you are already moving, use  
NEUTRAL (N) only.  
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled  
Cranking System. This feature assists in  
starting the engine and protects components.  
If the ignition key is turned to the START  
position, and then released when the engine  
begins cranking, the engine will continue  
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle  
starts. If the engine does not start and the  
key is held in START for many seconds,  
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds  
to prevent cranking motor damage.  
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your  
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could  
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)  
only when your vehicle is stopped.  
Manual Transmission  
The shift lever should be in the neutral position  
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the  
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine.  
Your vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is  
not all the way down. That is a safety feature.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To prevent gear damage, this system also  
prevents cranking if the engine is already  
running. Engine cranking can be stopped by  
turning the ignition switch to ACC or LOCK.  
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops  
again, do the same thing. This clears the extra  
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the  
engine immediately after starting it. Operate  
the engine and transmission gently until the oil  
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.  
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods  
of time, by returning the key to the START  
position immediately after cranking has ended,  
can overheat and damage the cranking  
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least  
15 seconds between each try, to allow  
the cranking motor to cool down.  
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with  
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add  
electrical parts or accessories, you could  
change the way the engine operates. Before  
adding electrical equipment, check with  
your retailer. If you do not, your engine might  
not perform properly. Any resulting damage  
would not be covered by your vehicle’s  
warranty.  
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,  
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F  
or 18°C), it could be flooded with too much  
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator  
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it  
there as you hold the key in START for up to  
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least  
15 seconds between each try, to allow the  
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine  
starts, let go of the key and accelerator.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Transmission Operation  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,  
the shift lever is located on the center console  
between the front seats.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your  
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in  
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly  
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left  
the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure your vehicle will not move,  
even when you are on fairly level ground,  
use the steps that follow.  
There are several  
different positions for  
the shift lever.  
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)  
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an  
automatic transmission shift lock control system.  
You must fully apply your regular brakes first  
and then press the shift lever button before you  
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is  
in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),  
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the  
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you  
maintain brake application. Then press the shift  
lever button and move the shift lever into another  
gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 89.  
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.  
It is the best position to use when you start the  
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your  
vehicle is moving forward could damage the  
transmission. The repairs would not be covered  
by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only  
after your vehicle is stopped.  
{CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while your  
engine is running at high speed is  
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on  
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move  
very rapidly. You could lose control and  
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a  
drive gear while your engine is running  
at high speed.  
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.  
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use  
REVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and  
forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without  
damaging your transmission. See If Your  
on page 224 for additional information.  
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does  
not connect with the wheels. To restart when  
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.  
You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when your  
vehicle is being towed.  
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or  
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at  
high speed may damage the transmission.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running  
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.  
It provides better fuel economy for your vehicle.  
If you need more power for passing, and  
you are:  
your brakes. You might choose FOURTH (4)  
instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly,  
winding roads and when going down a steep hill.  
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for  
normal driving. However, it reduces the vehicle’s  
speed without using your brakes, for slight  
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise  
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If constant  
upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving on  
steep hills, this position can be used to prevent  
repetitive types of shifts. You might choose  
INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) when  
driving on hilly and winding roads.  
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the  
accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,  
push the accelerator all the way down.  
The transmission will shift down to a lower  
gear and have more power.  
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road  
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”  
under Loss of Control on page 208.  
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed  
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without using your  
brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or  
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in  
LOW (L), the transmission will not shift into  
low gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.  
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up  
rather slowly or not shift gears when you go  
faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle  
that way, you could damage the transmission.  
Have your vehicle serviced right away. You  
can drive in LOW (L) when you are driving less  
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for  
higher speeds until then.  
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the  
vehicle in one place on a hill using only  
the accelerator pedal may damage the  
transmission. If you are stuck, do not spin  
the tires. When stopping on a hill, use  
the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.  
FOURTH (4): This position is also used for  
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle  
speed more than DRIVE (D) without using  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let  
up on the accelerator pedal and shift into  
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch  
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.  
Manual Transmission Operation  
This is the shift pattern  
for a manual  
transmission.  
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into  
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the  
same way you do for SECOND (2).  
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press  
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,  
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,  
and shift to NEUTRAL.  
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or  
idle your engine.  
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:  
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into  
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal  
as you press the accelerator pedal.  
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going  
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a  
complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),  
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on  
the clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal back  
down. Then shift into FIRST (1).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch  
pedal. After the vehicle stops, shift into  
Parking Brake  
REVERSE (R). Slowly let up on the clutch  
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. If it is  
hard to shift, let the shift lever return to NEUTRAL  
and release the clutch pedal. Then press the  
clutch pedal again and shift into REVERSE (R).  
Do not attempt to shift into the fifth gear  
position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).  
Your transmission has a lock out feature which  
prevents a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.  
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your  
vehicle is moving forward could damage  
the transmission. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Shift to  
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is  
stopped.  
The parking brake lever is located between the  
front seats.  
To se the parking brake, hold the brake pedal  
down and pull up on the parking brake lever.  
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light  
on page 134.  
Also, use FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R), along  
with the parking brake, for parking your vehicle.  
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal  
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can  
press the release button. Hold the release button  
in as you move the brake lever all the way down.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime  
will sound and a warning message will be displayed  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the  
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 kph). See  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even  
when you are on fairly level ground, use  
the steps that follow.  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on  
can overheat the brake system and cause  
premature wear or damage to brake system  
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully  
released and the brake warning light is  
off before driving.  
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the  
parking brake.  
Shifting Into Park (P)  
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding  
the button on the shift lever and pushing  
the lever all the way toward the front of the  
vehicle.  
(Automatic Transmission)  
{CAUTION:  
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your  
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in  
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.  
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you  
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key  
in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, see if  
you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)  
without first pushing the shift lock release button.  
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully  
locked into PARK (P).  
Leaving Your Vehicle With the  
Engine Running  
{CAUTION:  
Torque Lock  
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle  
with the engine running. Your vehicle  
could move suddenly if the shift lever is  
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking  
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the  
vehicle with the engine running, it could  
overheat and even catch fire. You or  
others could be injured. Do not leave your  
vehicle with the engine running.  
If you are parking on a hill and you do not  
shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly,  
the weight of the vehicle may put too much  
force on the parking pawl in the transmission.  
You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever  
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”  
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake  
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you  
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see  
on page 87.  
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)  
and your parking brake is firmly set before you  
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into  
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you are ready to drive, move the shift  
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the  
parking brake.  
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):  
1. Fully release the shift lever button.  
2. While holding down the brake pedal,  
press the shift lever button again.  
If torque lock does occur, you may need to  
have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to  
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl  
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift  
lever out of PARK (P).  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.  
If you still cannot move the shift lever from  
PARK (P), consult your dealer.  
Shifting Out of Park (P)  
Parking Your Vehicle  
(Manual Transmission)  
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission  
shift lock control system.  
Before leaving your manual transmission vehicle,  
fully press the clutch pedal in, move the shift  
lever in either FIRST (1) gear or REVERSE (R),  
and firmly apply the parking brake. See Manual  
To shift out of PARK (P):  
1. Apply the regular brake pedal.  
2. Then press the shift lever button.  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parking Over Things That Burn  
{CAUTION:  
Things that can burn could touch hot  
exhaust parts under your vehicle and  
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,  
dry grass, or other things that can burn.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Exhaust  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your vehicle was damaged when  
driving over high points on the  
road or over road debris.  
Repairs were not done correctly.  
Your vehicle or exhaust system has  
been modified improperly.  
{CAUTION:  
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the  
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you  
cannot see or smell. It can cause  
unconsciousness and death.  
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming  
into your vehicle:  
You might have exhaust coming in if:  
Your exhaust system sounds strange  
or different.  
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.  
Your vehicle was damaged in a  
collision.  
Drive it only with all the windows  
down to blow out any CO; and  
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running the Engine While Parked  
{CAUTION:  
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if  
you ever have to, here are some things to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your  
vehicle if the automatic transmission shift  
lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the  
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can  
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the  
engine is running unless you have to.  
If you have left the engine running, the  
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others  
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle  
will not move, even when it is on fairly  
level ground, always set the parking brake  
and move the automatic transmission  
shift lever to PARK (P), or the manual  
transmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine with the climate control  
system off could allow dangerous exhaust  
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution  
under Engine Exhaust on page 91.  
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let  
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your  
vehicle even if the climate control fan is  
at the highest setting. One place this  
can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with  
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park  
in a garage with the engine running.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle  
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)  
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.  
See Winter Driving on page 218.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outside Power Mirrors  
Mirrors  
The controls for the  
Manual Rearview Mirror  
outside power mirrors  
are located on the  
driver’s door.  
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving  
position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly  
behind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the  
center to move it up or down and side to side.  
The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust  
the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind  
you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime  
use and to the left for daytime use.  
Manual Rearview Mirror  
with OnStar®  
Move the selector switch located below the  
four-way control pad to the left or right to  
choose either the driver’s side or passenger’s  
side mirror.  
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving  
position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly  
behind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the  
center to move it up or down and side to side.  
The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust  
the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind  
you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime  
use and to the left for daytime use.  
There may also be three OnStar® buttons located  
at the bottom of the mirror face. See OnStar®  
System on page 94 for more information.  
To adjust a mirror, use the arrows located on  
the four-way control pad to move the mirror in  
the desired direction. Adjust each outside mirror  
so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind  
it can be seen while sitting in a comfortable  
driving position.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the  
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel  
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting  
OnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®  
Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms and  
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®  
Subscriber glove box literature. For more  
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact  
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)  
or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar®  
button to speak with an OnStar® advisor  
OnStar® System  
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and  
live advisors to provide you with a wide range  
of safety, security, information, and convenience  
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is  
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®  
Emergency advisors who can request emergency  
services be sent to your location. If you lock  
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at  
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal  
to unlock your doors. If you need roadside  
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they  
can contact Roadside Service for you.  
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
Not all OnStar® features are available on all  
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to  
provide the services described below, or for a  
full description of OnStar® services and system  
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in  
your glove box or visit onstar.com.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar® Services  
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance  
AccidentAssist  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics  
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics  
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with  
30 complimentary minutes  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)  
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound  
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is  
included for one year from the date of purchase.  
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,  
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.  
For more information, press the OnStar® button  
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services  
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle  
Location Assistance) may not be available  
until you register with OnStar®.  
Available Services included with  
Directions & Connections® Plan  
All Safe and Sound Plan Services  
Available Services with  
Safe & Sound® Plan  
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered  
or OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
(If equipped)  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)  
(If equipped)  
RideAssist  
Information and Convenience Services  
Link to Emergency Services  
Roadside Assistance  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor  
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible  
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls  
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is  
fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be  
used with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.  
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a  
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a  
Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending  
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the  
OnStar® Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove  
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca,  
or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing  
the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827).  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®  
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes  
to access location-based weather, local traffic  
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the  
phone button and giving a few simple voice  
commands, you can browse through the  
various topics. See the OnStar® Owners Guide  
for more information (Only available in the  
continental U.S.).  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls  
How OnStar® Service Works  
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that  
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free  
on page 188 for more information.  
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,  
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability  
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.  
This information is automatically sent to an  
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®  
button press, Emergency button press or if  
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The  
vehicle information usually includes your GPS  
location and, in the event of a crash, additional  
information regarding the accident that your  
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction  
from which your vehicle was hit). When you  
use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®  
Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends  
OnStar® your GPS location so that we can  
provide you with location-based services.  
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the  
button for a few seconds and give the command  
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®  
Hands-Free Calling feature.  
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used  
to dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to  
dial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s  
Guide for more information.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle  
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement  
with a wireless service provider for service in  
that area. OnStar® service also cannot work  
unless you are in a place where the wireless  
service provider OnStar® has hired for that area  
has coverage, network capacity and reception  
when the service is needed, and technology  
that is compatible with the OnStar® service.  
Not all services are available everywhere,  
particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or  
at all times.  
Your vehicle must have a working electrical  
system (including adequate battery power) for the  
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other  
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent  
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you  
at any particular time or place. Some examples are  
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an  
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather  
or wireless phone network congestion.  
Your Responsibility  
You may need to increase the volume of your  
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next  
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that  
your system is not functioning properly and should  
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears  
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®  
subscription has expired. You can always press  
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®  
equipment is active.  
OnStar® service that involves location  
information about your vehicle cannot work  
unless GPS satellite signals are unobstructed  
and available in that place as well.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage Areas  
Glove Box  
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.  
Use the key to lock and unlock.  
Cupholder(s)  
Your vehicle has a cupholder on the passenger  
side of the center console. To access it, press  
and release the forward section of the cupholder.  
There are two cupholders located in the center  
console, press and release to extend forward.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Center Console Storage Area  
Convertible Top  
There is also an upright center console storage  
area between the seatbacks. To open the storage  
area, press and release the button near the top  
so it extends out. Then, turn the button in  
either direction to unlatch the lid and pull the  
console lid down. Press the release button back  
in after you close the lid.  
For care and cleaning of the convertible top,  
see Convertible Top on page 320 under “Service  
and Appearance Care”. High pressure car  
washes may cause water to enter the vehicle.  
The following procedures explain the proper  
operation of the manual convertible top.  
The parts of the manual convertible top that are  
used when lowering and raising it are:  
A. Front Edge  
B. Side Edge  
C. Rear Buttresses  
D. Trunk  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down  
and exposing the interior of your vehicle  
to outdoor conditions may cause damage.  
Always close the convertible top if leaving  
your vehicle outdoors.  
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible  
top while the vehicle is in motion, you  
could damage the top or the top mechanism.  
The repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty. Always put an automatic  
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual  
transmission in FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R),  
turn the ignition off and engage the parking  
brake before raising or lowering the  
convertible top.  
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when  
there are objects in the storage area could  
damage it or break the glass rear window.  
Always verify that no objects are in the storage  
area before lowering the convertible top.  
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet,  
or dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damage  
to the inside of your vehicle. Dry off the top  
before lowering it.  
{CAUTION:  
Moving parts of the convertible top can  
be dangerous. People can be injured by  
the convertible top and its mechanism.  
Keep people away from your vehicle  
when you are lowering or raising the top.  
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle  
in cold weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you  
may damage top components. Do not lower  
the top in cold weather.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lowering the Manual Convertible Top  
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking  
brake. Shift an automatic transmission into  
PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission  
into FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).  
2. Make sure the ignition is turned off.  
3. Push the trunk release button located in  
the glove box, or on the remote keyless  
entry, if equipped.  
4. Lift the trunk.  
5. The convertible top front latch, located above  
the inside rearview mirror, must be unlatched.  
Pull the latch down and turn it counterclockwise  
to unlatch it.  
Leave the latch open and turned to prevent  
damage.  
6. Pull rearward on the side edge (B) of the  
convertible top and pull it off of the windshield  
frame.  
7. Push the convertible top down into the  
trunk (D).  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed  
at the factory on the trunk lid surface under the  
convertible top buttresses. This film is designed  
to help prevent paint damage to the trunk lid.  
Do not remove this protective film. It is intended to  
remain permanently affixed to the trunk lid surface.  
Raising the Manual Convertible Top  
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake  
firmly and shift an automatic transmission into  
PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission into  
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).  
2. Make sure the ignition is turned off, and lower  
the windows.  
8. After the top is stored, apply one even push,  
as shown, on the convertible top to ensure that  
the top is fully retracted and securely stored.  
9. Close the trunk (D) by pressing down on it  
with a swift, firm motion.  
3. Push the trunk release button located in the  
glove box, or on the remote keyless entry,  
if equipped.  
4. Lift the trunk.  
Do not operate rear defogger when convertible  
top is down.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull the convertible top forward by firmly  
gripping the side edge (B) and applying a  
brisk upward and forward motion to get the  
top in the full-up position.  
9. At the rear edge of the convertible top, press  
down on the two buttresses (C) to latch them  
into the top of the trunk.  
A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed  
at the factory on the trunk lid surface under  
the convertible top buttresses. This film is  
designed to help prevent paint damage to the  
trunk lid. Do not remove this protective film.  
It is intended to remain permanently affixed to  
the trunk lid surface.  
6. Pull the front edge (A) of the convertible top  
forward from the outside of the vehicle, or  
push the front edge (A) of the convertible  
top forward from the inside of the vehicle.  
7. Turn the top front latch handle clockwise to  
latch the convertible top.  
8. Close the trunk (D) by pushing it down with  
a swift, firm motion.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:  
A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control  
M. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System  
System on page 122.  
on page 122.  
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 126.  
N. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See  
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn  
D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped).  
See Cruise Control on page 115.  
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument  
O. Shift Lever. See Manual Transmission  
Operation on page 85. See Automatic  
(If Equipped).  
Panel Cluster on page 128.  
P. Parking Brake Lever. See Parking Brake  
on page 86.  
Q. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on  
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).  
page 188.  
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard  
Warning Flashers on page 110.  
H. Fog Lamp Button. See Fog Lamps on page 120.  
page 158.  
R. Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control  
on page 201.  
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See  
J. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See  
K. Horn. See Horn on page 110.  
L. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See  
Windshield Wipers on page 113 and  
Windshield Washer on page 114.  
S. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory  
Power Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and  
Power Outlet(s) on page 121.  
T. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 99.  
U. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 68.  
V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 99.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Other Warning Devices  
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.  
They also let police know you have a problem.  
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on  
and off.  
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up  
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)  
behind your vehicle.  
Horn  
The hazard warning  
flasher button is located  
in the center of the  
instrument panel.  
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the  
steering wheel.  
Tilt Wheel  
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel  
before you drive. You can raise the steering  
wheel to the highest level to give your legs more  
room when you enter and exit the vehicle.  
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what  
position your key is in, and even if the key is  
not in the ignition switch.  
Press the button to make the front and rear turn  
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button  
again to turn the flashers off.  
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your  
turn signals will not work.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel  
is located on the left side of the steering column.  
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See  
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move  
the wheel to a comfortable position, pull up  
the lever to lock the wheel in place.  
23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.  
on page 112.  
Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on  
page 112.  
O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps  
on page 118.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and  
two downward (for left) positions. These positions  
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.  
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or  
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will  
return automatically.  
To change the headlamps from low beam to high  
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.  
When the high beams  
are on, this light on the  
instrument panel  
cluster will also be on.  
An arrow on the  
instrument panel cluster  
will flash in the  
direction of the turn or  
lane change.  
To change the headlamps from high beam to low  
beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.  
Flash-to-Pass  
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever  
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you  
complete your lane change. The lever will return  
by itself when you release it.  
This feature lets you use your high-beam  
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that  
you want to pass.  
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows  
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and  
other drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is  
burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.  
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever  
toward you until the high-beam headlamps  
come on, then release the lever to turn them off.  
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a  
turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit  
Breakers on page 325.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittent  
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with  
this symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter or  
longer delay between wipes. To the left of the  
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from  
bottom to top, that indicate the frequency of the  
wipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement is  
less frequent. Larger bars mean the movement  
is more frequent.  
Windshield Wipers  
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first  
setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at  
low speed.  
Use this lever, located on the right side of the  
steering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.  
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the  
second setting past intermittent, for wiping at high  
speed.  
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to  
turn off the windshield wipers.  
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to  
this position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there  
until the windshield wipers start; then let go.  
The windshield wipers will stop after one wiping  
cycle. If you want additional wiping cycles, hold the  
lever down longer.  
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):  
Move the lever to this position for intermittent or  
speed sensitive operation. When you select  
this position, the delay will vary depending on  
the vehicles speed, as well as the manually  
selected delay.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from  
seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid  
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the  
wiper blades before using them.  
Windshield Washer  
To wash the windshield, press the button at the  
end of the lever until the washers begin.  
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,  
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades  
do become damaged, get new blades or blade  
inserts.  
{CAUTION:  
In freezing weather, do not use your  
washer until the windshield is warmed.  
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice  
on the windshield, blocking your vision.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.  
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it  
cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an  
overload. If the motor gets stuck, turn the wipers  
off, clear away the snow or ice, and then turn  
the wipers back on.  
When you release the button, the washers will  
stop, but the wipers will continue to wipe  
about three times or will resume the previous  
speed.  
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on  
for more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps  
will turn on automatically. They will turn off  
15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Cruise Control  
Cruise Control  
With cruise control, your vehicle can maintain a  
speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without  
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can  
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not  
work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).  
{CAUTION:  
If you leave your cruise control on when  
you are not using cruise, you might hit a  
button and go into cruise when you do not  
want to. You could be startled and even  
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch  
off until you want to use cruise control.  
{CAUTION:  
Cruise control can be dangerous where  
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.  
So, do not use your cruise control on  
winding roads or in heavy traffic.  
The cruise control  
buttons are located on  
the left side of the  
steering wheel.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on  
slippery roads. On such roads, fast  
changes in tire traction can cause  
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose  
control. Do not use cruise control on  
slippery roads.  
J(On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise  
control system on and off. The LED indicator light  
will turn on and off when this button is pressed.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a  
set speed and to accelerate the speed.  
Increasing Speed While Using  
Cruise Control  
SET(Set): Press this button to set a speed and  
There are two ways to increase speed.  
to decrease the speed.  
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the  
brake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate  
to a higher speed and reset the cruise control.  
To set a speed do the following:  
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.  
The indicator light on the button will come on.  
2. Get to the speed you want.  
3. Press the SETcontrol button and release it.  
The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appear  
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to  
show the system is engaged.  
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,  
press the RES+ button. Press it until you get up  
to the speed you want, and then release the  
button. To increase your speed in very small  
amounts, press the RES+ button briefly and  
then release it. Each time you do this, your  
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
Reducing Speed While Using  
Cruise Control  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired  
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of  
course, disengages the cruise control. To return to  
your previously set speed, you do not need to  
go through the set process again. Once you’re  
going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you  
can press the RES+ button briefly.  
If the cruise control system is already engaged,  
Push and hold the SETpart of the button  
until you reach the lower speed you want,  
then release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts, push the  
SETpart of the button briefly. Each time you  
do this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)  
slower.  
This will take you back up to your previously  
chosen speed and stay there.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
Ending Cruise Control  
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake  
pedal or the clutch pedal if your vehicle has  
a manual transmission.  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.  
When you take your foot off the pedal, your  
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed  
you set earlier.  
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal  
will only end the current cruise control session.  
Press the cruise control on/off button to turn  
the system completely off.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
How well your cruise control will work on hills  
depends upon your speed, load and the steepness  
of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may  
have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain  
your speed. When going downhill, you may  
have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your  
speed down. Of course, applying the brake  
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find  
this to be too much trouble and do not use  
cruise control on steep hills.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
When you turn off the cruise control or the  
ignition, your cruise control set speed memory  
is erased.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P(Off/On): This position is an Off/On switch for  
the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this  
applies to vehicles with an automatic transmission  
set to PARK (P) and manual transmission vehicles  
with the parking brake engaged.  
Headlamps  
When operating in AUTO, a brief turn of the switch  
to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp  
System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message will  
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and  
a chime will sound. Turning the switch to off/on  
again will turn the Automatic Headlamp System  
back on. An AUTO LIGHTS ON message will  
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
operates the exterior lamps.  
The Automatic Headlamp System is always turned  
on at the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicles  
with manual transmission. When the parking brake  
is engaged, the automatic headlamps will turn off.  
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, when  
the shift lever is shifted out of PARK (P), the  
Automatic Headlamp System will turn on. Shifting  
the lever back to PARK (P) will turn off the  
automatic headlamp system for vehicles with an  
automatic transmission.  
The exterior lamp switch has the following  
four positions:  
2(Headlamps): This position turns on the  
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.  
;(Parking Lamps): This position turns on the  
parking lamps and taillamps only.  
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This  
position automatically turns on the Daytime  
Running Lamps during daytime, and the  
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,  
sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lights  
will not be on.  
Headlamps on Reminder  
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off  
and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.  
The DRL system turns off on U.S. vehicles by  
using the on/off switch for one ignition cycle,  
if the vehicle is in the PARK (P) position, or if the  
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km h)  
after the vehicle is started.  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier  
for others to see the front of your vehicle during  
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different  
driving conditions, but they can be especially  
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before  
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps  
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.  
For vehicles first sold in Canada the DRL system  
will turn off when a automatic transmission  
vehicle is in the PARK (P) position or the park  
brake is set on a manual transmission vehicle and  
the vehicle speed is less than 8 mph (13 km h).  
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the  
instrument panel that helps control the DRL.  
Make sure it is not covered or the headlamps  
will come on when they are not needed.  
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular  
headlamp system when it is needed.  
The DRL system makes both low beam headlamps  
turn on at reduced intensity when the following  
conditions are met:  
The ignition is on.  
The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.  
The light sensor detects daytime light.  
The shift lever is not in PARK (P).  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fog Lamps  
Instrument Panel Brightness  
The control for this feature is located on the  
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.  
The fog lamp button  
is located on the  
instrument panel,  
to the left of the  
steering wheel.  
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights  
or down to dim them.  
Entry/Exit Lighting  
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you  
open any door. These lamps will fade out after  
about 20 seconds after all of the doors have been  
closed or when the ignition is turned on. These  
lamps will also go on when you press the  
trunk release, unlock symbol button or the horn  
symbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.  
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.  
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An  
indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will  
come on when the fog lamps are on. Push the  
button again to turn the fog lamps off.  
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and  
off when the fog lamps are turned on and off.  
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about  
20 seconds after your key is removed from the  
ignition to provide an illuminated exit.  
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam  
headlamps are turned on.  
Mirror Reading Lamps  
Some localities have laws that require the  
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.  
Your vehicle has reading lamps on the rearview  
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading  
lamps on and off.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certain electrical accessories may not be  
compatible with the accessory power outlet and  
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.  
If you experience a problem, see your retailer for  
additional information on the accessory power  
outlet.  
Battery Run-Down Protection  
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed  
to protect your vehicle’s battery.  
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition  
is turned off, the battery rundown protection  
system will automatically turn the lamp off after  
20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.  
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to  
your vehicle may damage it or keep other  
components from working as they should.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding  
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.  
Check with your retailer before adding  
electrical equipment.  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
The accessory power outlet can be used to  
connect electrical equipment such as a cellular  
phone or CB radio.  
The accessory power outlet is located on the  
instrument panel, to the right of the radio.  
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to  
follow the installation instructions included with  
the equipment.  
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in  
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can  
cause damage not covered by your warranty.  
Do not hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug because the  
power outlets are designed for accessory  
power plugs only.  
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged  
in for an extended period of time while the  
vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is  
always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug  
electrical equipment when not in use and  
do not plug in equipment that exceeds  
the maximum 20 ampere rating.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter  
Climate Controls  
Your vehicle may have a removable muffin  
tin ashtray and cigarette lighter. The muffin tin  
ashtray can be placed into the front console side  
cupholder. To use the lighter, located on the  
instrument panel to the left side of the glove box  
door, push it in all the way and let go. When  
it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.  
Climate Control System  
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it  
is heating will not allow the lighter to back  
away from the heating element when it is hot.  
Damage from overheating may occur to the  
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be  
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in  
while it is heating.  
Climate Control System  
With this system you can control the heating,  
cooling, and ventilation of the vehicle. Set  
the control between modes to get a combination  
of the two modes.  
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other  
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes  
or other smoking materials could ignite  
them and possibly damage your vehicle.  
Never put flammable items in the ashtray.  
Temperature: Turn the left knob on the control  
panel to adjust the temperature of the air in  
the vehicle. Turn the knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the  
temperature.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Air conditioning does not operate at temperature  
below 40°F (4°C). In temperatures above 40°F  
(4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off in  
defrost, floor/defog, and recirculation modes  
because it helps to remove moisture from the  
vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.  
# (Air Conditioning): Press the left knob on  
the control panel to turn the air conditioning system  
on or off. An indicator light on the button will  
come on to let you know the air conditioning is  
activated. When the system is on, this setting cools  
and dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.  
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is  
turned off. If air conditioning is selected with  
fan off, the indicator light flashes three times and  
then turns off.  
On hot days, open the windows to let the hot  
inside air escape; then close them. This helps  
reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to  
cool down. It also helps the system to operate  
more efficiently.  
There could be a slight change in engine  
performance when the air conditioning compressor  
turns off and turns on again. This is normal. The  
system is designed to make adjustments to  
help with fuel economy while still maintaining the  
selected temperature.  
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:  
1. Select the vent mode.  
2. Select recirculation mode.  
3. Select the air conditioning to on.  
4. Select the coolest temperature.  
5. Select the highest fan speed.  
The air conditioning system removes moisture  
from the air, so a small amount of water can drip  
underneath your vehicle while idling or after  
turning off the engine. This is normal.  
Using these settings together for long periods of  
time can cause the air inside of the vehicle to  
become too dry. To prevent this from happening,  
after the air in the vehicle has cooled, turn the  
recirculation mode off.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The right knob on the control panel is used to  
direct the airflow inside the vehicle. Turn the knob  
to select one of the following modes:  
9 (Fan): Turn the center knob on the control  
panel to control the fan speed. Turn the knob  
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase  
or decrease the fan speed.  
H (Vent): Turn the right knob on the control  
panel to this mode to direct air to the instrument  
panel outlets.  
9 (Off): Turn the center knob to this position to  
turn the fan off.  
\ (Bi-Level): Turn the right knob on the control  
panel to this mode to direct air to the instrument  
panel outlets, and the remaining air to the  
floor outlets and the defroster and side window  
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets  
and warmer air to the floor outlets.  
? (Recirculation): Press the center knob on  
the control panel to recirculate air inside the  
vehicle and prevent outside air from coming in.  
It can be used to prevent outside odors from  
entering your vehicle and cool the air inside your  
vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn  
the recirculation mode on or off. An indicator light  
on the button can on while the recirculation  
mode is activated.  
[ (Floor): Turn the right knob on the control  
panel to this mode to direct most of the air to the  
floor outlets. The remaining air is directed to the  
side window and defroster outlets. If low or no  
airflow is on the passenger side, make sure that the  
carpet covering is tucked under floor outlets.  
Recirculation is available in the bi-level and vent  
modes. If recirculation is selected in either  
floor/heat, floor/defog, or defrost mode, the  
indicator light will flash three times indicating it is  
not available in that mode.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Defogging and Defrosting  
0 (Defrost): Turn the right knob on the control  
panel to this mode to direct most of the air to  
the windshield, and the side window outlets.  
When you select this mode, the system runs the  
air conditioning compressor unless the outside  
temperature is near or below freezing.  
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of  
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the  
cool window glass. This can be minimized if the  
climate control system is used properly. There  
are two modes to clear fog or frost from your  
windshield and side windows. Use the defog  
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and  
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to  
remove fog or frost from the windshield more  
quickly. For best results, clear all snow and ice  
from the windshield before defrosting. Use a  
temperature setting that provides warm air. The  
warmer the air the quicker the windows clear.  
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows  
are clear.  
Rear Window Defogger  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid  
to remove fog or frost from the rear window. Be  
sure to clear as much snow from the rear window  
as possible. An indicator light on the knob comes  
on while the rear window defogger is activated.  
The rear window defogger will turn off about  
fifteen minutes after the knob is pressed. If turned  
on again, the defogger will run for about seven and  
one-half minutes before turning off. If vehicle  
speed is greater than 50 mph (80 kph) and the  
rear defogger is active, it will remain on as long  
as the speed is greater than 50 mph (80 kph).  
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing  
the knob again or by turning off the engine.  
To prevent fogging on the inside of the windows  
in modes other than floor/defog and defrost,  
make sure the air conditioning compressor is on  
and recirculation mode is off.  
/ (Floor/Defog): Turn the right knob on the  
control panel to this mode to direct the air to the  
windshield, the side window outlets, and to the floor  
outlets. When you select this mode, the system  
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the  
outside temperature is near freezing or below.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not use the rear defogger when the convertible  
top is down.  
Your vehicle has flow through ventilation that  
allows outside air to be forced through your  
ventilation system when your vehicle is moving.  
Outside air will enter the vehicle when the air  
conditioning fan is running. Flow through  
ventilation can be stopped in vent and bi-level  
modes by pressing the recirculation button.  
= (Rear Defogger): Press the right knob on  
the control panel to turn the rear window defogger  
on or off. Do not use the rear defogger when  
the convertible top is down.  
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the  
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could  
cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not  
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal  
or anything similar to the defogger grid.  
Operation Tips  
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the  
air inlets at the base of the windshield that  
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.  
Use of non-Saturn approved hood deflectors  
may adversely affect the performance of the  
system.  
Outlet Adjustment  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of  
objects to help circulate the air inside of  
your vehicle more effectively.  
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the  
side of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.  
Use the tab located on the air outlets to change  
the direction of the airflow.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a  
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
Often gages and warning lights work together  
to let you know when there is a problem with  
your vehicle.  
Warning Lights, Gages, and  
Indicators  
This part describes the warning lights and gages  
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will  
help you locate them.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and  
stays on as you are driving, or when one of  
the gages shows there may be a problem, check  
the section that tells you what to do about it.  
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do  
repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So  
please get to know your warning lights and gages.  
They are a big help.  
Warning lights and gages can signal that  
something is wrong before it becomes serious  
enough to cause an expensive repair or  
replacement. Paying attention to your warning  
lights and gages could also save you or others  
from injury.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or  
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
As you will see in the details on the next few  
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when  
you start the engine just to let you know they  
are working. If you are familiar with this section,  
you should not be alarmed when this happens.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will  
know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will need  
to drive safely and economically.  
United States Base Cluster shown, Canada and Uplevel similar  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speedometer and Odometer  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both  
miles per hour(mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h).  
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime  
will be provided for several seconds to remind  
people to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety  
belt light will also be provided and stay on for  
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.  
You should buckle your seat belt.  
The vehicle’s odometer works together with the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). A Trip A and  
Trip B odometer can be set. See “Trip Information”  
under DIC Operation and Displays on page 144.  
The odometer mileage can be checked without the  
vehicle running. Open the driver’s door and the  
mileage will be displayed briefly.  
This chime and light  
will be repeated if the  
driver remains  
unbuckled and the  
vehicle is in motion.  
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer  
installed, the new one will be set to the correct  
mileage total of the old odometer.  
Tachometer  
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime  
nor the light will be provided.  
The tachometer displays the engine speed in  
revolutions per minute (rpm).  
Notice: If you operate the engine with the  
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your  
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer  
in the shaded warning area.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Safety Belt  
Reminder Light  
Airbag Readiness Light  
There is an airbag readiness light on the  
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag  
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s  
electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells  
you if there is an electrical problem. The  
system check includes the airbag sensor, the  
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing  
and diagnostic module. For more information  
on the airbag system, see Airbag System  
on page 43.  
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or  
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to  
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety  
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag  
is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on  
page 50 for more information. The passenger  
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for  
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.  
This chime and light will  
be repeated if the  
passenger remains  
unbuckled and  
This light will come on  
when you start your  
vehicle, and it will flash  
for a few seconds.  
Then the light should go  
out. This means the  
system is ready.  
the vehicle is in motion.  
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither  
the chime nor the light will come on.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you  
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,  
your airbag system may not work properly.  
Have your vehicle serviced right away.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.  
There is a passenger airbag status indicator on the  
instrument panel.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after  
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag  
system may not be working properly. The  
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in  
a crash, or they could even inflate without  
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself  
or others, have your vehicle serviced right  
away if the airbag readiness light stays  
on after you start your vehicle.  
United States  
Canada  
The indicator next to the passenger airbag status  
indicator lights is the passenger safety belt  
reminder light. See Passenger Safety Belt  
Reminder Light on page 130 for more information  
on that indicator.  
The airbag readiness light should flash for a  
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to  
RUN or START. If the light does not come on then,  
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if  
there is a problem.  
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,  
the passenger airbag status indicator will light  
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,  
for several seconds as a system check. Then,  
after several more seconds, the status indicator  
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on  
or off symbol to let you know the status of the  
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the  
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that  
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled  
(may inflate).  
{CAUTION:  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system  
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no  
system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be  
transported in vehicles with a rear seat  
that will accommodate a rear-facing child  
restraint, whenever possible.  
{CAUTION:  
If the on indicator comes on when you have  
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the  
right front passenger’s seat, it means that  
the passenger sensing system has not  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A  
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing  
child restraint in the right front passenger’s  
seat if the airbag is turned on.  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the  
airbag status indicator, it means that the  
passenger sensing system has turned off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger  
Sensing System on page 50 for more on this,  
including important safety information.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there  
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger  
sensing system. See your retailer for service.  
Charging System Light  
The charging system  
light will come on briefly  
when you turn on the  
ignition, and when  
the engine is not  
running, as a check to  
show you it is working.  
{CAUTION:  
If the off indicator and the airbag  
readiness light ever come on together, it  
means that something may be wrong with  
the airbag system. If this ever happens,  
have the vehicle serviced promptly,  
because an adult-size person sitting in the  
right front passenger seat may not have  
the protection of the frontal airbag. See  
Then it should go out when the engine is started.  
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,  
you may have a problem with the electrical  
charging system. Have it checked by your retailer.  
Driving while this light is on could drain your  
battery.  
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,  
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such  
as the radio and air conditioner.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning  
light will also come on when you set your  
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking  
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after  
your parking brake is fully released, it means you  
have a brake problem.  
Brake System Warning Light  
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided  
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other  
part can still work and stop you. For good  
braking, though, you need both parts working well.  
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake  
problem. Have your brake system inspected  
right away.  
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off  
the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking  
brake is fully released. You may notice that the  
pedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closer  
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is  
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See  
Towing Your Vehicle on page 230.  
{CAUTION:  
United States  
Canada  
Your brake system may not be working  
properly if the brake system warning light  
is on. Driving with the brake system  
warning light on can lead to an accident.  
If the light is still on after you have pulled  
off the road and stopped carefully, have  
the vehicle towed for service.  
This light should come on briefly when you turn  
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come  
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn  
you if there is a problem.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the regular brake system warning light is not  
on, you still have brakes, but you do not have  
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system  
warning light  
is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and  
there is a problem with your regular brakes.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 134.  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Warning Light  
Your vehicle may have  
the Anti-Lock Brake  
System (ABS).  
The ABS warning light will come on briefly  
when you turn the ignition key to RUN. This is  
normal. If the light does not come on then, have  
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there  
is a problem.  
This light will come on when your engine is  
started and may stay on for several seconds.  
That is normal.  
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the  
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon  
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start  
the engine again to reset the system. If the  
light still stays on after driving at a speed of at  
least 13 mph (20 km/h), or comes on again  
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the warning light does not come on then, have it  
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a  
problem. This light, along with the appropriate  
Driver Information Center (DIC) messages,  
indicates when the ESC system and the TCS are  
working or are disabled.  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Indicator/Warning Light  
(2.0L Engine Only)  
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and  
potentially the ESC system have been disabled.  
Check your DIC messaging to determine  
This light is located in  
the center of the  
instrument panel cluster.  
which feature(s) is no longer functioning and  
whether it is because of the driver turning off the  
feature(s), or the system may not be working  
properly and your vehicle requires service. If the  
TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be limited.  
If the ESC system is disabled, the system will not  
aid in maintaining vehicle directional control. In  
either case, adjust your driving accordingly.  
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability  
Control (ESC) system or the Traction Control  
System (TCS), this warning light should come on  
briefly when the engine is started.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the  
ESC system is actively working. Check the  
DIC messaging for details to determine which  
system is working. If the LOW TRACTION  
message appears, the system is limiting wheel  
spin. If the ESC ACTIVE message appears,  
the system is aiding in maintaining vehicle  
directional control.  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
The engine coolant  
temperature warning  
light will come on  
when the engine has  
overheated.  
See Electronic Stability Control on page 201 and  
for more information.  
If this happens you should pull over and turn off  
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine  
Overheating on page 258 for more information.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 147  
for more information on the messages associated  
with this light.  
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant  
temperature warning light on could cause your  
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating  
on page 258. Your vehicle could be damaged,  
and it might not be covered by your warranty.  
Never drive with the engine coolant  
temperature warning light on.  
This light will also come on briefly when starting  
your vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle  
serviced.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with  
this light on, after awhile, your emission  
controls may not work as well, your fuel  
economy may not be as good, and your engine  
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to  
costly repairs that may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
Your vehicle has a  
computer which  
monitors operation of  
the fuel, ignition,  
and emission control  
systems.  
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system  
of your vehicle or the replacement of the  
original tires with other than those of the same  
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect  
your vehicle’s emission controls and may  
cause this light to come on. Modifications to  
these systems could lead to costly repairs not  
covered by your warranty. This may also  
result in a failure to pass a required Emission  
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories  
and Modifications on page 233.  
This system is called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to  
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for  
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner  
environment. The check engine light comes on to  
indicate that there is a problem and service is  
required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the  
system before any problem is apparent. This may  
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This  
system is also designed to assist your service  
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light should come on, as a check to show  
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the  
engine is not running. If the light does not  
come on, have it repaired. This light will also  
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do  
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park  
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least  
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light  
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”  
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the  
previous steps, and see your retailer for service as  
soon as possible.  
Light Flashing — A misfire condition has  
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle  
emissions and may damage the emission  
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and  
service may be required.  
If the Light Is On Steady  
You may be able to correct the emission system  
malfunction by considering the following:  
Light On Steady — An emission control  
system malfunction has been detected on your  
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be  
required.  
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?  
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully  
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 238.  
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap  
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or  
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the  
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap  
properly installed should turn the light off.  
If the Light is Flashing  
The following may prevent more serious damage  
to your vehicle:  
Reducing vehicle speed  
Avoiding hard accelerations  
Avoiding steep uphill grades  
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?  
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The  
condition will usually be corrected when the  
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips  
should turn the light off.  
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,  
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?  
Emissions Inspection and  
Maintenance Programs  
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.  
See Gasoline Octane on page 235. Poor fuel  
quality will cause your engine not to run as  
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as  
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put  
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on  
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These  
conditions may go away once the engine is  
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system  
and cause the light to turn on.  
Some state/provincial and local governments have  
or may begin programs to inspect the emission  
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass  
this inspection could prevent you from getting a  
vehicle registration.  
Here are some things you need to know to help  
your vehicle pass an inspection:  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the  
check engine light is on or not working properly.  
If you experience one or more of these conditions,  
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at  
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the  
light off.  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if  
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines  
that critical emission control systems have not  
been completely diagnosed by the system.  
The vehicle would be considered not ready for  
inspection. This can happen if you have recently  
replaced your battery or if your battery has  
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to  
evaluate critical emission control systems  
during normal driving. This may take several days  
of routine driving. If you have done this and  
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for  
lack of OBD system readiness, your retailer  
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.  
If none of the above steps have made the light  
turn off, your retailer can check the vehicle.  
Your retailer has the proper test equipment  
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or  
electrical problems that may have developed.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may  
blink on and then off.  
Oil Pressure Light  
If you have a low engine  
oil pressure problem,  
this light will stay on after  
you start your engine,  
or come on when you  
are driving.  
If you make a hard stop, the light may come  
on for a moment. This is normal.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is  
low. If you do, your engine can become  
so hot that it catches fire. You or others  
could be burned. Check your oil as soon  
as possible and have your vehicle  
serviced.  
This indicates that your engine is not receiving  
enough oil.  
The engine could be low on oil, or could have  
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.  
The oil light could also come on in three other  
situations:  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
may damage the engine. The repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow  
the maintenance schedule in this manual for  
changing engine oil.  
When the ignition is on but the engine is not  
running, the light will come on as a test to  
show you it is working, but the light will go  
out when you turn the ignition to START.  
If it does not come on with the ignition on, you  
may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.  
Have it fixed right away.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Light  
Highbeam On Light  
This light comes on  
when the high-beam  
headlamps are in use.  
This light flashes when  
the vehicle security  
system is activated.  
page 112.  
Fog Lamp Light  
Trunk Ajar Light  
The fog lamp light will  
come on when the fog  
lamps are in use.  
This light will come on  
briefly when you turn  
the ignition to RUN.  
The light will go out when the fog lamps are  
turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 120 for  
more information.  
This light will also come on and a chime will sound if  
the trunk is ajar. There will also be a TRUNK AJAR  
message in your Driver Information Center (DIC).  
For more information see DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 147. Do not drive with the  
trunk ajar.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner  
or speed up.  
Fuel Gage  
Your fuel gage tells you  
about how much fuel  
you have left.  
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you  
turn off the ignition.  
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and  
Specifications on page 331.  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
If your vehicle has this  
light, it will come on  
briefly when you  
are starting the engine.  
Here are four things that some owners ask about.  
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:  
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off  
before the gage reads full.  
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low  
on fuel. When you add fuel the light should go  
off. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than  
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may  
have indicated the tank was half full, but it  
actually took a little more or less than half the  
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some  
vehicle information mode displays, select a  
personalization menu mode setting, or  
acknowledge a warning message.  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center  
(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status of  
many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also  
used to display driver personalization menu modes  
and warning/status messages. All messages will  
appear in the DIC display, located at the bottom of  
the tachometer on the instrument panel cluster.  
Press and hold the information and reset buttons  
at the same time for one second, then release  
the buttons to enter the personalization menu.  
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 152 for  
more information.  
The DIC buttons are  
located on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
DIC Operation and Displays  
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The  
DIC has different modes which can be accessed  
by pressing the DIC buttons. The button functions  
are detailed in the following.  
q (Information): Press this button to scroll  
through the vehicle information mode displays.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TRIP A or TRIP B  
Information Modes  
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B  
is displayed. These modes show the current  
distance traveled since the last reset for each trip  
odometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).  
Both odometers can be used at the same time.  
q (Information): Press this button to scroll  
through the following vehicle information modes:  
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer  
Press the information button until the outside air  
temperature and the odometer are displayed. This  
mode shows the temperature outside of the vehicle  
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees  
Celsius (°C) and the total distance the vehicle has  
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).  
The outside air temperature will appear on the left  
side of the DIC display and the odometer will  
appear on the right side of the display.  
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately  
by pressing and holding the reset button for a  
few seconds while the desired trip odometer  
is displayed.  
FUEL RANGE  
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE  
is displayed. This mode shows the remaining  
distance you can drive without refueling in either  
miles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based on  
fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.  
To change the DIC display to English or metric  
units, see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 152.  
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW  
will display.  
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel  
range is an average of recent driving conditions.  
As your driving conditions change, this data is  
gradually updated. The FUEL RANGE mode  
cannot be reset.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ECON (Economy)  
OIL LIFE  
Press the information button until ECON is  
displayed. This mode shows how many miles per  
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)  
your vehicle is getting based on current and past  
driving conditions.  
Press the information button until OIL LIFE is  
displayed. The engine oil life system shows  
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will  
show 100% when the system is reset after an  
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a  
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.  
Press and hold the reset button while ECON is  
displayed to reset the average fuel economy.  
Average fuel economy will then be calculated  
starting from that point. If the average fuel  
economy is not reset, it will be continually updated  
each time you drive.  
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring  
the oil life, additional maintenance is  
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this  
manual. See Engine Oil on page 245 and  
Scheduled Maintenance on page 336.  
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil  
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life  
System” under Engine Oil Life System on  
page 250.  
AV (Average) SPEED  
Press the information button until AV SPEED is  
displayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s average  
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per  
hour (km/h).  
COOLANT  
Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED  
is displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.  
Press the information button until COOLANT is  
displayed. This mode shows the temperature of the  
engine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or  
degrees Celsius (°C).  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BOOST (Turbo Only)  
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON  
If your vehicle has this feature, press the  
This message displays if the automatic headlamp  
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.  
information button until BOOST is displayed. This  
mode shows a graphic that indicates the amount  
of boost the engine is receiving in either  
BRAKE FLUID  
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).  
This message displays to inform the driver that the  
brake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.  
The brake system warning light on the instrument  
panel cluster also comes on. See Brake System  
Warning Light on page 134 for more information.  
Have the brake system serviced by your retailer  
as soon as possible.  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
These messages appear if there is a problem  
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.  
A message will clear when the vehicle’s condition  
is no longer present. To acknowledge a message  
and clear it from the display, press and hold  
any of the DIC buttons. If the condition is still  
present, the warning message will come back on  
the next time the vehicle is turned off and back  
on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds  
when the message displays. Your vehicle may  
have other warning messages.  
CHANGE OIL SOON  
This message displays when the life of the engine  
oil has expired and it should be changed.  
When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOON  
message by clearing it from the display, you  
still must reset the engine oil life system  
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on  
page 250 and Scheduled Maintenance on  
page 336 for more information.  
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF  
This message displays if the automatic headlamp  
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECK GAS CAP  
CRUISE ENGAGED  
This message displays if the fuel cap has not  
been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make  
sure that it is on properly. A few driving trips  
with the cap properly installed should turn  
the message off.  
This message displays when the cruise control  
system is active. See Cruise Control on page 115  
for more information.  
DOOR AJAR  
This message displays if one or more of the  
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When this  
message displays, make sure that the door(s)  
are closed completely.  
COMPETITIVE MODE  
If your vehicle has this feature, this message  
displays when the Competitive Driving mode is  
selected. The Traction Control System (TCS) will  
not be operating while in the Competitive  
Driving mode and the ESC/TCS light on the  
instrument panel cluster will be on solid. Adjust  
your driving accordingly. See Electronic Stability  
on page 136 for more information.  
ENGINE DISABLED  
This message displays if the starting of the engine  
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
retailer immediately.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE  
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control  
(ESC), this message displays and the ESC/TCS  
light on the instrument panel cluster flashes  
when ESC is assisting you with directional control  
of the vehicle. You may feel or hear the system  
working and see this message displayed in  
the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when  
this message is displayed, so adjust your  
driving accordingly. This message may stay on for  
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you  
with directional control of the vehicle. This  
is normal when the system is operating. See  
Engine Only) on page 136 for more information.  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability  
Control (ESC), this message displays and the  
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster  
comes on solid when ESC is turned off. Adjust  
your driving accordingly. See Electronic Stability  
on page 136 for more information.  
ICE POSSIBLE  
This message displays when the outside air  
temperature is cold enough to create icy road  
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW  
This message displays if the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace  
the battery in the transmitter. See “Battery  
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation on page 63.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOW COOLANT  
PARKING BRAKE  
This message displays when there is a low level  
of engine coolant. Have the cooling system  
serviced by your retailer as soon as possible.  
See Engine Coolant on page 255 for more  
information.  
This message displays if the parking brake is left  
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 86 for  
more information.  
SERVICE AIR BAG  
This message displays when there is a problem  
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced  
by your retailer immediately.  
LOW TRACTION  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control  
System (TCS), this message displays and the  
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster  
flashes when the system is actively limiting wheel  
spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if this  
message is displayed, so adjust your driving  
accordingly. This message stays on for a few  
seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.  
Light (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more  
information.  
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY  
CONTROL)  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability  
Control (ESC), this message displays and a chime  
sounds if there has been a problem detected with  
ESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears on the  
instrument panel cluster. This light stays on solid as  
long as the detected problem remains present.  
When this message displays, the system is not  
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See  
Only) on page 136 for more information.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull  
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.  
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off  
and then back on. If this message still stays on or  
turns back on again while you are driving, your  
vehicle needs service. Have the ESC inspected by  
your retailer as soon as possible.  
TRACTION OFF  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control  
System (TCS), this message displays and the  
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster  
comes on solid when the TCS is turned off. Adjust  
your driving accordingly. See Traction Control  
on page 136 for more information.  
SERVICE TRACTION  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control  
System (TCS), this message displays and a chime  
sounds when the system is not functioning  
properly. The ESC/TCS light also appears on the  
instrument panel cluster. This light stays on  
solid as long as the detected problem remains  
present. When this message displays, the system  
is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
TRUNK AJAR  
This message displays when the trunk lid is not  
closed completely. Make sure that the trunk  
lid is closed completely. See Trunk on page 68  
and Trunk Ajar Light on page 142.  
Light (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more  
information. Have the TCS serviced by your  
retailer as soon as possible.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Press and hold the information and reset  
buttons at the same time for one second, then  
release to enter the personalization menu.  
DIC Vehicle Personalization  
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that  
allow you to program certain features to a  
preferred setting. All of the features listed may not  
be available on your vehicle. Only the features  
available will be displayed on the DIC.  
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph  
(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will be  
accessible.  
3. Press the information button to scroll through  
the available personalization menu modes.  
The default settings for the features were set  
when your vehicle left the factory, but may have  
been changed from their default state since  
that time.  
Press the reset button to scroll through  
the available settings for each mode.  
If you do not make a selection within  
ten seconds, the display will go back to  
the previous information displayed.  
To change feature settings, use the following  
procedure:  
Entering Personalization Menu  
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is  
stopped.  
Personalization Menu Modes  
OIL LIFE RESET  
When this feature is displayed, you can reset  
the engine oil life system. To reset the system,  
see Engine Oil Life System on page 250. See  
“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays  
on page 144 for more information.  
To avoid excessive drain on the battery,  
it is recommended that the headlamps  
are turned off.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNITS  
LOCK HORN  
This feature allows you to select the units of  
measurement in which the DIC will display the  
vehicle information. When UNITS appears on the  
display, press and hold the reset button for at  
least one second to scroll through the available  
settings:  
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),  
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to  
chirp every time the lock button on the RKE  
transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.  
When LOCK HORN appears on the display,  
press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
ENGLISH (default in United States): All  
information will be displayed in English units.  
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the  
first press of the lock button on the RKE  
transmitter. The horn will still chirp on the  
second press.  
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will  
be displayed in metric units.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the  
lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
Operation on page 63 for more information.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNLOCK HORN  
LIGHT FLASH  
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),  
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to  
chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the  
RKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.  
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,  
press and hold the reset button for at least  
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),  
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior  
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the  
lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on the  
RKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or  
disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on  
the display, press and hold the reset button for at  
least one second to scroll through the available  
settings:  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the  
unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.  
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will  
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release  
buttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.  
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of  
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.  
Operation on page 63 for more information.  
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal  
lighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk  
release buttons on the RKE transmitter are  
pressed.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
Operation on page 63 for more information.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DELAY LOCK  
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)  
This feature, which delays the actual locking of  
the vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When  
DELAY LOCK appears on the display, press and  
hold the reset button for at least one second  
to scroll through the available settings:  
This feature, which allows the vehicle to  
automatically unlock certain doors, can be enabled  
or disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on the  
display, press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically  
ON (default): The doors will not lock until  
five seconds after the last door is closed. You can  
temporarily override delayed locking by pressing  
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter a second time.  
unlock.  
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically  
unlock.  
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.  
You will need to manually unlock the doors.  
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when  
pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the  
door(s) will automatically unlock when the key is  
turned off.  
See Delayed Locking on page 67 and Remote  
for more information.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you  
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur.  
See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission  
Only)” following.  
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will  
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).  
See Automatic Door Unlock on page 68 for  
more information.  
See Automatic Door Unlock on page 68 for more  
information.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS  
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),  
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior  
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock  
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, can  
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS  
appears on the display, press and hold the reset  
button for at least one second to scroll through  
the available settings:  
UNLK (Unlock)  
(Automatic Transmission Only)  
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an  
automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is  
selected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature  
determines when the automatic door unlocking will  
occur. When UNLK appears on the display, press  
and hold the reset button for at least one second to  
scroll through the available settings:  
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not  
turn on when the unlock button on the RKE  
transmitter is pressed.  
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key  
is turned off.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will  
turn on when the unlock button on the RKE  
transmitter is pressed.  
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information  
in Spanish.  
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information  
in German.  
Operation on page 63 for more information.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and exit out  
of the personalization menu mode.  
Choose one of the available settings and press  
the information button to select it and move on  
to the next feature.  
Exiting Personalization Menu  
LANGUAGE  
The personalization menu will be exited when  
any of the following conditions occur:  
This feature allows you to select the language in  
which the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE  
appears on the display, press and hold the reset  
button for at least one second to scroll through  
the available settings:  
A ten second time period has elapsed.  
The ignition is turned off.  
The end of the personalization menu list  
is reached.  
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all  
information in English.  
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information  
in French.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then  
read the pages following to familiarize yourself  
with its features.  
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a  
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on  
page 192. By taking a few moments to read this  
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s  
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as  
well as take advantage of its features. While your  
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by  
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the  
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when  
driving conditions permit, you can tune to  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
tasks while driving can cause a crash and  
you or others can be injured or killed.  
Always keep your eyes on the road and  
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging  
in extended searching while driving.  
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for  
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive  
Driving on page 192.  
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid  
distraction while driving.  
your favorite stations using the presets and  
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.  
While your vehicle is parked:  
Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.  
Familiarize yourself with its operation.  
Set up your audio system by presetting your  
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and  
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving  
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite  
radio stations using the presets and steering  
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.  
{CAUTION:  
This system provides you with a far greater  
access to audio stations and song listings.  
Giving extended attention to entertainment  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment  
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,  
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,  
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be  
added by checking with your retailer. Also,  
check federal rules covering mobile radio and  
telephone units. If sound equipment can be  
added, it is very important to do it properly.  
Added sound equipment may interfere with  
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,  
or other systems, and even damage them.  
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with  
the operation of sound equipment that  
has been added.  
Setting the Time  
(Without Date Display)  
If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with a  
single CD player and preset buttons numbered  
one through six, the radio will have a clock button  
for setting the time. You can set the time by  
following these steps:  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or  
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the  
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.  
2. Press the clock button until the hour numbers  
begin flashing on the display. Press the clock  
button a second time and the minute  
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained  
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the  
audio system can be played even after the  
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) on page 79 for more information.  
numbers will begin flashing on the display.  
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers  
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on  
the upper right side of the radio, clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease  
the time.  
4. Press the clock button again until the clock  
display stops flashing to set the currently  
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing will  
stop after five seconds and the current  
time displayed will be automatically set.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour, press the clock button and then the  
pushbutton located under the forward arrow label.  
Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,  
press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option to select the default. Press the clock button  
again to apply the selected default, or let the  
screen time out.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one  
of the labels that you want to change. Every  
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time  
or the date if selected, increases by one.  
Another way to increase the time or date, is  
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD  
(forward) button.  
To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or  
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the  
tune knob, located on the upper right side of  
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.  
Setting the Time (With Date Display)  
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD  
player, the radio has a clock button for setting the  
time and date.  
The date does not automatically display. The only  
way to see the date is by pressing the clock  
button when the radio is on. The date with display  
times out after a few seconds and goes back to  
the normal radio and time display.  
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or  
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the  
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.  
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD  
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of  
the clock button to set the time and date.  
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN,  
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,  
and year) displays.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:  
The date does not automatically display. The only  
way to see the date is by pressing the MENU  
button and then the clock button when the radio  
is on. The date with display times out after a  
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio  
and time display.  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or  
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the  
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.  
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock  
option is displayed.  
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or to change the date default setting  
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow  
these instructions:  
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.  
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one  
of the labels that you want to change. Every  
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time  
or the date if selected, increases by one.  
1. Press the clock button and then the  
pushbutton located under the forward arrow  
label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and  
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)  
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)  
displays.  
Another way to increase the time or date,  
is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD  
(forward) button.  
To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or  
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the  
tune knob, located on the upper right side of  
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the  
desired option.  
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to  
apply the selected default, or let the screen  
time out.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding a Station  
Radio with CD (Base)  
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,  
FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK  
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station  
and stay there.  
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK  
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The  
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,  
then goes to the next station. Press either  
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.  
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
Playing the Radio  
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the  
system on and off.  
4(Information): Press this button to switch the  
display between the radio station frequency  
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this  
button to display the time.  
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
increase or decrease the volume.  
The radio remembers the previous volume setting  
whenever the radio is turned on. You can still  
manually adjust the volume by using the  
volume knob.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Preset Stations  
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)  
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),  
can be programmed on the six numbered  
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:  
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass  
or treble, press the tune knob or bass/treble  
pushbutton until the desired tone control label  
appears on the display. Turn the tune knob  
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or  
decrease the setting. You can also adjust  
the setting by pressing either the SEEK, FWD  
(forward), or REV (reverse) buttons. The display  
shows the current bass or treble level. If a station’s  
frequency is weak, or if there is static, decrease  
the treble.  
1. Turn the radio on.  
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.  
3. Tune in the desired station.  
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered  
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep  
sounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed  
and released, the station that was set,  
returns.  
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select  
preset equalization settings.  
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each  
pushbutton.  
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ  
button until Manual appears on the display or start  
to manually adjust the bass or treble by pressing  
the tune knob.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The  
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.  
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the  
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob  
until the desired speaker control label appears  
on the display. Turn the tune knob clockwise  
or counterclockwise to adjust the setting. You can  
also adjust the setting by pressing either the  
SEEK, FWD, or REV buttons.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or  
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it  
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on  
the radio display. As each new track starts to  
play, the track number appears on the display.  
Radio Messages  
Calibration Error: The audio system has been  
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.  
If Calibration Error displays, it means that the  
radio has not been configured properly for your  
vehicle and it must be returned to your retailer for  
service.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and  
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be  
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of  
recording, the quality of the music that has been  
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been  
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,  
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading  
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the  
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the  
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,  
or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the  
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs  
on page 190 for more information.  
Loc (Locked): This message is displayed while  
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.  
Take the vehicle to your retailer for service.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your retailer.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known  
good CD.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the  
CD currently playing.  
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert  
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or  
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you  
could damage the CD player. When using the  
CD player, use only CDs in good condition  
without any label, load one CD at a time, and  
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of  
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to  
the start of the current track, if more than  
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK  
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is  
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues  
moving backward or forward through the CD.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button  
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will  
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this  
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The  
elapsed time of the track appears on the display.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught  
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a  
personal computer and a description label is  
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded  
CD with a marking pen.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold  
this pushbutton to advance playback quickly within  
a track. You will hear sound at a reduced  
volume. Release this pushbutton to resume playing  
the track. The elapsed time of the track appears  
on the display.  
If an error appears on the display, see  
“CD Messages” later in this section.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD EJECT button to  
eject the CD. If the CD is not removed, after  
several seconds, the CD automatically pulls  
back into the player.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to  
CD tracks in random, rather than sequential  
order. To use random, do the following:  
4(Information): Press this button to switch the  
display between the track number, elapsed time of  
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off,  
press this button to display the time.  
1. Press this button to play tracks from the CD  
you are listening to in random order. The  
random icon appears on the display.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
while a CD is playing. The CD remains safely  
inside the radio for future listening.  
2. Press this button again to turn off random  
play. The random icon disappears from the  
display.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon  
and track number appears on the display while a  
CD is in the player. Press this button again  
and the system automatically searches for an  
auxiliary input device such as a portable audio  
player.  
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire  
CD can be repeated (played over and over).  
To use repeat, do the following:  
To repeat the track you are listening to, press  
and release the RPT button. An arrow symbol  
appears on the display. Press RPT again  
to turn off repeat play.  
To repeat the CD you are listening to, press  
and hold the RPT button for a few seconds.  
An arrow symbol appears on the display.  
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.  
When repeat is off, the symbol is no longer  
displayed.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD Messages  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.  
This is not an audio output; do not plug the  
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.  
You can however, connect an external audio  
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3  
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc.  
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another  
source for audio listening.  
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the  
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be  
for one of the following reasons:  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the CD should play.  
You are driving on a very rough road. When the  
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or  
upside down.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary  
device while the vehicle is in park (P). See  
Defensive Driving on page 192 for more  
information on driver distraction.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour  
and try again.  
There may have been a problem while burning  
the CD-R.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm  
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary  
input jack. When a device is connected, press  
the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing  
audio from the device over the car speakers.  
The label may be caught in the CD player.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other  
reason, try a known good CD.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and  
provide it to your retailer while reporting the  
problem.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the  
volume of the portable player. You may need to  
do additional volume adjustments from the portable  
device if the volume does not go loud or soft  
enough.  
Radio with CD (MP3)  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
while a portable audio device is playing. The  
portable audio device continues playing, so you  
may want to stop it or turn it off.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.  
Press this button again and the system begins  
playing audio from the connected portable  
audio player. If a portable audio player is not  
connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.  
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with  
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The audio system has a Radio Data System  
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only  
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.  
This system relies upon receiving specific  
information from these stations and only works  
when the information is available. While the  
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station  
name or call letters appear on the display.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast  
incorrect information that causes the radio features  
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the  
radio station.  
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio  
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When  
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts  
to compensate for road and wind noise as you  
speed up or slow down while driving. That way, the  
volume level should sound about the same as  
you drive. To activate SCV:  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in  
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.  
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast  
channels including music, news, sports, talk,  
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s  
programming. XM™ provides digital quality  
audio and text information that includes song title  
and artist name. A service fee is required in  
order to receive the XM™ service. For more  
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at  
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)  
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO  
VOLUM label on the radio display.  
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV  
setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the  
level of radio volume compensation. Each  
higher setting allows for more radio volume  
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.  
The display times out after approximately  
10 seconds.  
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).  
Playing the Radio  
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the  
system on and off.  
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
increase or decrease the volume.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding a Station  
4(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,  
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information  
button to display additional text information related  
to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3  
song. A choice of additional information such as:  
Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT may appear.  
Continue pressing the information button to  
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton  
positioned under any one of the labels and the  
information about that label is displayed.  
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,  
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows  
the selection.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK  
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station  
and stay there.  
While information is not available, No Info displays.  
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK  
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The  
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,  
then goes to the next station. Press either  
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station  
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to  
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites  
button, and steering wheel controls if the  
vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving  
on page 192.  
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations  
can be programmed as favorites using the  
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station  
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites  
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to  
go through up to six pages of favorites, each  
having six favorite stations available per page.  
Each page of favorites can contain any  
The number of favorites pages can be setup using  
the MENU button. To setup the number of  
favorites pages, perform the following steps:  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
FAV 1through 6 label.  
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)  
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform  
the following steps:  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages  
by pressing the pushbutton located below the  
displayed page numbers.  
1. Tune to the desired radio station.  
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time  
out, to return to the original main radio  
screen showing the radio station frequency  
labels and to begin the process of  
2. Press the FAV button to display the page  
where you want the station stored.  
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons  
until a beep sounds. Whenever that  
pushbutton is pressed and released, the  
station that was set, returns.  
programming your favorites for the chosen  
amount of numbered pages.  
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio  
station you want stored as a favorite.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ  
button until Manual displays or start to manually  
adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing  
the tune knob.  
Setting the Tone  
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):  
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune  
knob until the tone control labels appear on the  
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired  
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under  
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise  
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted  
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting  
by pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward) or  
REV (reverse) button until the desired levels  
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak,  
or if there is static, decrease the treble.  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance  
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker  
control labels appear on the display. Continue  
pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the  
pushbutton positioned under the desired label.  
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
to adjust the highlighted setting. You can also  
adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the  
SEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desired  
levels are obtained.  
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the  
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than  
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level  
adjusts to the middle position.  
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle  
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the  
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.  
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle  
position.  
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to  
the middle position, press the tune knob for  
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.  
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to  
the middle position, press the tune knob for  
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.  
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select  
preset equalization settings.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed  
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired  
category, perform the following:  
Finding a Category (CAT) Station  
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find  
XM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™  
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired  
category, perform the following:  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
XM CAT label.  
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™  
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button  
to display the category labels on the radio  
display. Continue pressing the CAT button  
until the desired category name is displayed.  
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category  
you want removed.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the  
Remove label until the category name  
along with the word Removed displays.  
2. Press either of the two buttons below  
the desired category label to immediately tune  
to the first XM™ station associated with  
that category.  
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.  
Removed categories can be restored by pressing  
the pushbutton under the Add label when a  
removed category is displayed or by pressing the  
pushbutton under the Restore All label.  
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below  
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the  
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next  
or previous XM™ station within the selected  
category.  
The radio does not allow you to remove or add  
categories while the vehicle is moving faster  
than 5 mph (8 km/h).  
4. To exit the category search mode, press the  
FAV button or BAND button to display your  
favorites again.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio Messages  
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)  
Calibration Error: The audio system has been  
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.  
If Calibration Error displays, it means that the  
radio has not been configured properly for your  
vehicle and it must be returned to your retailer  
for service.  
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the  
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.  
To insert one CD, do the following:  
1. Press and release the load button.  
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.  
Locked: This message is displayed when the  
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the  
radio. Take the vehicle to your retailer for service.  
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,  
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.  
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error  
cannot be corrected, contact your retailer.  
1. Press and hold the load button for  
two seconds. A beep sounds and Load All  
Discs displays.  
Radio Messages for XM™ Only  
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to  
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to  
six CDs.  
See XM Radio Messages on page 186 later in  
this section for further detail.  
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)  
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading  
more CDs.  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.  
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin  
playing.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or  
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it  
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears  
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,  
the track number appears on the display.  
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert  
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or  
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you  
could damage the CD player. When using the  
CD player, use only CDs in good condition  
without any label, load one CD at a time, and  
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of  
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs  
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same  
manner.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be  
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of  
recording, the quality of the music that has been  
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been  
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,  
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading  
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the  
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the  
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,  
or scratched, the CD will not play properly.  
If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of  
Your CDs on page 190 for more information.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught  
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a  
personal computer and a description label is  
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded  
CD with a marking pen.  
If an error appears on the display, see  
“CD Messages” later in this section.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD EJECT button to eject  
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,  
press and release this button. A beep sounds and  
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,  
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.  
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,  
the CD automatically pulls back into the player  
and begin playing.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known  
good CD.  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the  
EJECT button for two seconds to eject all discs.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to  
the tracks in random, rather than sequential  
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD  
player. To use random, do one of the following:  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the  
CD currently playing.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go  
to the start of the current track, if more than  
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK  
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow  
is held, or pressed multiple times, the player  
continues moving backward or forward through  
the tracks on the CD.  
Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single  
CD player, insert a disc partway into the slot of  
the CD player. A RDM label appears on the  
display.  
To play the tracks from the single CD in  
random order, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the RDM label until Random Current  
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to  
turn off random play.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button  
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will  
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this  
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The  
elapsed time of the track appears on the display.  
Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD  
player, press and hold the LOAD button.  
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.  
Insert one or more discs partway into the  
slot of the CD player.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold  
this button to advance playback quickly within a  
track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.  
Release this button to resume playing the  
track. The elapsed time of the track appears on  
the display.  
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a  
six-disc CD player in random order, press  
the pushbutton positioned under the  
RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.  
Press the same pushbutton again to turn  
off random play.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
while a CD is playing. The CD remains safely  
inside the radio for future listening.  
CD Messages  
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the  
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be  
for one of the following reasons:  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon  
and a message showing disc and/or track number  
appears on the display when a CD is in the  
player. Press this button again and the system  
automatically searches for an auxiliary input  
device, such as a portable audio player.  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the CD should play.  
You are driving on a very rough road. When the  
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or  
upside down.  
If a portable audio player is not connected,  
“No Input Device Found” displays.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour  
and try again.  
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
There may have been a problem while burning  
the CD.  
If your radio system has a single CD (MP3) player  
or a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable of  
playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more  
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or  
CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 179  
later in this section.  
The label may be caught in the CD player.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other  
reason, try a known good CD.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and  
provide it to your retailer while reporting the  
problem.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the  
volume of the portable player. You may need to  
do additional volume adjustments from the portable  
device if the volume does not go loud or soft  
enough.  
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.  
This is not an audio output; do not plug the  
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.  
You can however, connect an external audio  
device such as an iPod, laptop computer,  
MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player,  
etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another  
source for audio listening.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
while a portable audio device is playing. The  
portable audio device continues playing, so you  
may want to stop it or turn it off.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary  
device while the vehicle is in park (P). See  
Defensive Driving on page 192 for more  
information on driver distraction.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.  
Press this button again and the system begins  
playing audio from the connected portable  
audio player. If a portable audio player is not  
connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a  
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front  
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,  
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing  
audio from the device over the car speakers.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MP3 Format  
Using an MP3  
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal  
computer:  
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded  
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,  
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,  
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,  
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.  
Song title, artist name, and album can display  
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.  
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc.  
Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files  
on one disc.  
The CD player is able to read and play a  
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and  
255 files.  
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to  
find songs while driving. Organize songs by  
albums using one folder for each album.  
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs  
or less.  
Compressed Audio  
The radio also plays discs that contain both  
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and  
MP3 files. By default the radio reads only the  
uncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.  
Pressing the CAT (category) button toggles  
between compressed and uncompressed  
audio format.  
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up  
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total  
number of folders to a minimum in order to  
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying  
to locate a particular folder during playback.  
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl  
extension (other file extensions may not work).  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Minimize the length of the file, folder, or  
playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist  
names, or a combination of a large number of  
files and folders, or playlists can cause the  
player to be unable to play up to the maximum  
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.  
If you wish to play a large number of files,  
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize  
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.  
Long names also take up more space on  
the display, and might not fully display.  
Root Directory  
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a  
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio  
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All  
files contained directly under the root directory are  
accessed prior to any root directory folders.  
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed  
before root folders or files.  
Empty Directory or Folder  
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere  
in the file structure that contains only folders/  
subfolders and no compressed files directly  
beneath them, the player advances to the next  
folder in the file structure that contains compressed  
audio files. The empty folder does not display.  
Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.  
Trying to add music to an existing disc  
can cause the disc not to function in the  
player.  
Change playlists by using the previous and next  
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.  
An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no file  
folders can also be played. If a CD-R contains  
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,  
and 255 files, the player lets you access and  
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over  
the maximum are not accessible.  
No Folder  
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,  
the files are located under the root folder. The next  
and previous folder functions are not displayed  
on a CD-R that was recorded without folders  
or playlists. When displaying the name of the  
folder the radio displays ROOT.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CD-R contains only playlists and  
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are  
located under the root folder. The folder down  
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)  
first and then goes to the root folder. When  
the radio displays the name of the folder, the  
radio displays ROOT.  
File System and Naming  
The song name that displays is the song name that  
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not  
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the  
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as  
the track name.  
Track names longer than 32 characters or  
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the  
last page of text and the extension of the filename  
does not display.  
Order of Play  
Tracks recorded to the CD-R are played in the  
following order:  
Play begins from the first track in the first  
playlist and continues sequentially through  
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track  
of the last playlist has played, play continues  
from the first track of the first playlist.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using  
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™  
software, can be accessed, however, they cannot  
be edited using the radio. These playlists are  
treated as special folders containing compressed  
audio song files.  
Play begins from the first track in the first  
folder and continues sequentially through  
all tracks in each folder. When the last track  
of the last folder has played, play continues  
from the first track of the first folder.  
When play enters a new folder, the display does  
not automatically show the new folder name unless  
the folder mode was chosen as the default  
display. The new track name displays.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If these problems occur, check the bottom surface  
of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,  
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will  
not play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled,  
see Care of Your CDs on page 190 for more  
information.  
Playing an MP3  
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD  
Player), or press the load button and wait for the  
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),  
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R  
should begin playing.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known  
good CD.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in  
the player, it stays in the player. When the  
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to  
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected  
audio source.  
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert  
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or  
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you  
could damage the CD player. When using the  
CD player, use only CDs in good condition  
without any label, load one CD at a time, and  
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of  
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.  
As each new track starts to play, the track number  
and song title displays.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size  
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the  
same manner.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught  
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a  
personal computer and a description label is  
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD  
with a marking pen.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced  
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording,  
the quality of the music that has been recorded,  
and the way the CD-R has been handled. There  
can be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding  
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting.  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in  
this section.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject  
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently  
playing, press and release this button. A beep will  
sound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the  
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R  
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,  
after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pulls  
back into the player and begins playing. For the  
Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button  
for two seconds to eject all discs.  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder label to go to the  
first track in the previous folder.  
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder label to go to the  
first track in the next folder.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button  
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.  
You will hear sound at a reduced volume.  
Release this button to resume playing the file.  
The elapsed time of the file displays.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on  
the CD-R currently playing.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this  
button to advance playback quickly within an MP3  
file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.  
Release this button to resume playing the file.  
The elapsed time of the file displays.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to  
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than  
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK  
arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either  
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times,  
the player continues moving backward or forward  
through MP3 files on the CD.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting,  
MP3 files on the CD-R can be played in random,  
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or  
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random,  
do one of the following:  
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator  
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order  
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located  
below the music navigator label. The player scans  
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3  
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan  
the disc depending on the number of MP3 files  
recorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playing  
while it is scanning the disc in the background.  
When the scan is finished, the CD-R begins  
playing again.  
1. To play MP3 files in random order from  
the CD-R that is currently playing, press  
the pushbutton positioned under the RDM  
label until Random Current Disc displays.  
Press the same pushbutton again to turn off  
random play.  
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a  
six-disc CD player in random order, press  
the pushbutton positioned under the  
RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.  
Press the same pushbutton again to turn  
off random play.  
Once the disc has been scanned, the player  
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist.  
The current artist playing is shown on the  
second line of the display between the arrows.  
Once all songs by that artist are played, the player  
moves to the next artist in alphabetical order  
on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 files by  
that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files  
by another artist, press the pushbutton located  
below either arrow button. The CD goes to  
the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.  
Continue pressing either button until the desired  
artist displays.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change from playback by artist to playback  
by album, press the pushbutton located below  
the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push  
one of the buttons below the album button.  
Press the pushbutton below the back label to  
return to the main music navigator screen.  
The album name displays on the second line  
between the arrows and songs from the current  
album and begins to play. Once all songs from  
that album are played, the player moves to  
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R  
and begins playing MP3 files from that album.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the  
radio for future listening.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to  
play a CD while listening to the radio. The CD  
icon and a message showing disc and/or  
track number displays while a CD is in the  
player. Press this button again and the system  
automatically searches for an auxiliary input  
device such as a portable audio player.  
If a portable audio player is not connected,  
“No Aux Input Device” displays.  
To exit music navigator mode, press the  
pushbutton below the Back label to return to  
normal MP3 playback.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM Radio Messages  
Radio Display Message  
Condition  
Action Required  
XL (Explicit Language  
Channels)  
XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a  
after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
indicates content with  
explicit language.  
XM Updating  
No XM Signal  
Loading XM  
Updating  
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and  
no action is required. This process should take no longer  
than 30 seconds.  
encryption code  
Loss of signal  
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a  
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move  
into an open area, the signal should return.  
Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text  
(after four second delay) data. No action is needed. This message should disappear  
shortly.  
Channel Off Air  
Channel Unavail  
Channel not in service  
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another  
channel.  
Channel no longer  
available  
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.  
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,  
choose another station for that preset button.  
No Artist Info  
Artist Name/Feature  
not available  
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.  
The system is working properly.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Radio Display Message  
Condition  
Action Required  
No Title Info  
Song/Program Title  
not available  
No song title information is available at this time on this  
channel. The system is working properly.  
No CAT Info  
Category Name  
not available  
No category information is available at this time on this  
channel. The system is working properly.  
No Information  
CAT Not Found  
XM Theftlocked  
No Text/Informational  
message available  
No text or informational messages are available at this time  
on this channel. The system is working properly.  
No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.  
the chosen category  
Theftlock® active  
The system is working properly.  
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been  
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers  
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message  
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with  
your retailer.  
XM Radio ID  
Unknown  
Radio ID label  
(channel 0)  
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the  
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed  
to activate the service.  
Radio ID not known  
(should only be if  
hardware failure)  
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there  
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.  
Check XM Receivr  
XM Not Available  
Hardware failure  
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,  
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.  
XM™ Not Available  
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,  
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to  
the next or to the previous stored radio station and  
stay there. Press and hold the up or down arrow  
longer than three-quarters of a second to advance  
to the next or previous station with a strong  
signal in the selected band.  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft  
of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works  
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is  
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and  
LOCK or LOCKED will appear on the display.  
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will  
not operate if stolen.  
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down  
arrow to go to the next or previous track. Press  
and hold the up or down arrow longer than  
three-quarters of a second to continue advancing  
ahead or reversing back, to other tracks within  
the disc.  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
+ (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to  
Radio controls are  
located on the right side  
of the steering wheel  
and if your vehicle  
has this feature, some  
audio controls can  
be adjusted at  
increase or to decrease the volume.  
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to  
silence the system. Press this button again to  
turn the sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®,  
press and hold this button for two seconds  
to initiate the OnStar system. See OnStar® System  
on page 94 in this manual for more information.  
this location. They  
include the following.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FM Stereo  
Radio Reception  
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals  
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).  
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM  
You may experience frequency interference and  
static during normal radio reception if items  
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience  
accessories, and external electronic devices  
are plugged into the accessory power outlet.  
If there is interference or static, unplug the item  
from the accessory power outlet.  
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio  
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous  
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,  
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite  
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.  
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy  
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause  
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.  
The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to  
indicate interference.  
AM  
The range for most AM stations is greater than  
for FM, especially at night. The longer range  
can cause station frequencies to interfere with  
each other. For better radio reception, most  
AM radio stations will boost the power levels  
during the day, and then reduce these levels  
during the night. Static can also occur when  
things like storms and power lines interfere  
with radio reception. When this happens,  
try reducing the treble on your radio.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Care of Your CDs  
Fixed Mast Antenna  
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original  
cases or other protective cases and away from  
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans  
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of  
a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,  
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not  
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a  
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth  
in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed  
with water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping  
process starts from the center to the edge.  
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car  
washes without being damaged. If the mast should  
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by  
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.  
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is  
still tightened to the fender. If tightening is  
required, tighten by hand, then with a wrench  
one quarter turn.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna  
System  
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while  
handling it; this could damage the surface.  
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or  
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.  
Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio  
antenna that is located on the trunk of your  
vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice  
build up for clear radio reception.  
Care of the CD Player  
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players  
because the lens of the CD optics can become  
contaminated by lubricants.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your Driving, the Road, and  
Your Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
Defensive driving really means “Be ready  
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,  
or expressways, it means “Always expect  
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians  
or other drivers are going to be careless  
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they  
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions  
are about the most preventable of  
Defensive Driving  
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:  
Drive defensively.  
Please start with a very important safety device in  
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They  
Are for Everyone on page 12.  
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow  
enough following distance. Defensive  
driving requires that a driver concentrate  
on the driving task. Anything that distracts  
from the driving task makes proper  
defensive driving more difficult and can  
even cause a collision, with resulting  
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these  
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to  
do them. These simple defensive driving  
techniques could save your life.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half  
the adult population — choose never to drink  
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.  
For persons under 21, it is against the law in  
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good  
medical, psychological, and developmental  
reasons for these laws.  
Drunken Driving  
Death and injury associated with drinking and  
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number  
one contributor to the highway death toll,  
claiming thousands of victims every year.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to  
drive a vehicle:  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink  
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?  
How much is “too much” if someone plans  
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.  
Although it depends on each person and situation,  
here is some general information on the problem.  
Judgment  
Muscular Coordination  
Vision  
Attentiveness  
Police records show that almost half of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most  
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who  
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more  
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths  
have been associated with the use of alcohol,  
with more than 300,000 people injured.  
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of  
someone who is drinking depends upon  
four things:  
The amount of alcohol consumed  
The drinker’s body weight  
The amount of food that is consumed before  
and during drinking  
The length of time it has taken the drinker to  
consume the alcohol  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
According to the American Medical Association,  
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce  
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up  
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person  
would reach the same BAC by drinking three  
4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed  
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of  
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.  
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,  
if the same person drank three double martinis  
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,  
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.  
A person who consumes food just before or during  
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.  
There is a gender difference, too. Women  
generally have a lower relative percentage of  
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in  
body water, this means that a woman generally will  
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her  
same body weight will when each has the same  
number of drinks.  
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout  
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.  
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.  
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France  
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial  
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.  
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to  
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have  
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the  
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC  
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving  
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC  
There is something else about drinking and driving  
that many people do not know. Medical research  
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make  
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the  
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when  
anyone who has been drinking — driver or  
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance  
of being killed or permanently disabled is  
higher than if the person had not been drinking.  
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are  
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC  
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the  
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for  
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.  
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has  
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a  
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver  
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of  
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!  
{CAUTION:  
Drinking and then driving is very  
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,  
attentiveness, and judgment can be  
affected by even a small amount of  
alcohol. You can have a serious — or  
even fatal — collision if you drive after  
drinking. Please do not drink and drive  
or ride with a driver who has been  
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you  
are with a group, designate a driver  
who will not drink.  
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the  
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or  
number of cold showers will speed that up.  
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if  
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden  
action, as when a child darts into the street?  
A person with even a moderate BAC might not  
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the  
collision.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control of a Vehicle  
Braking  
You have three systems that make your  
vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the  
brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All  
three systems have to do their work at the places  
where the tires meet the road.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 134.  
Braking action involves perception time and  
reaction time.  
First, you have to decide to push on the brake  
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to  
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.  
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or  
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems  
than the tires and road can provide. That means  
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction  
Control System (TCS) on page 199 and  
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a  
second. But that is only an average. It might be less  
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds  
or more with another. Age, physical condition,  
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.  
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in  
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at  
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That  
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so  
keeping enough space between your vehicle and  
others is important.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 233.  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary  
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is  
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,  
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the  
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;  
and the amount of brake force applied.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive  
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by  
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with  
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have  
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes  
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy  
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and  
allow realistic following distances, you will  
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means  
better braking and longer brake life.  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System  
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system  
that will help prevent a braking skid.  
When you start your engine and begin to drive  
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a  
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test  
is going on, and you may even notice that  
your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.  
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are  
driving, brake normally but do not pump the  
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to  
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have  
some power brake assist. But you will use it  
when you brake. Once the power assist is used  
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal  
will be harder to push.  
If there is a problem  
with ABS, this warning  
light will stay on.  
Light on page 135.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 233.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than  
any driver could. The computer is programmed  
to make the most of available tire and road  
conditions. This can help you steer around the  
obstacle while braking hard.  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving  
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of  
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.  
Here is what happens with ABS:  
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.  
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the  
computer will separately work the brakes at each  
wheel.  
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving  
updates on wheel speed and controls braking  
pressure accordingly.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remember: ABS does not change the time you  
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or  
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too  
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have  
time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly  
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up  
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.  
The system operates only if it senses that the rear  
wheels are spinning too much or are beginning  
to lose traction. When this happens, the system  
works the rear brakes and reduces engine  
power (by closing the throttle and managing  
engine spark) to limit wheel spin.  
This light will flash  
when your traction  
control system is  
limiting wheel spin.  
You may feel or hear  
the system working,  
but this is normal.  
Using ABS  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may  
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel  
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.  
Braking in Emergencies  
(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more  
information.  
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same  
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you  
more than even the very best braking.  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the  
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,  
the cruise control will automatically disengage.  
When road conditions allow you to safely  
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Your vehicle may have a traction control  
system called TCS that limits wheel spin. This  
is especially useful in slippery road conditions.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the system is on,  
this warning light will  
come on and stay on to  
let you know if there  
is a problem.  
Press the traction control system button again to  
turn the system back on. The DIC will display  
the appropriate message when you press  
the button.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 233 for more information.  
When this light is on solid and either the SERVICE  
TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message is  
displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin.  
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 147.  
Limited-Slip Rear Axle  
Your vehicle may have a limited-slip rear  
differential which provides maximum power and  
performance. It is designed to give you additional  
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It  
works like a standard axle most of the time, but  
when one of the rear wheels has no traction  
and the other does, this feature will allow  
the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.  
The traction control system automatically comes on  
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel  
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you  
should always leave the system on. You can turn  
the traction control system off if you ever need to.  
During a sudden shift, such as shifting from  
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2) gear at low engine  
speeds or suddenly applying the clutch, you may  
feel or hear a clunking or rattling noise. This is  
normal.  
To turn the system off,  
press and release this  
button located on  
the console.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light is located  
on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
Electronic Stability Control  
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Electronic  
Stability Control (ESC) system which combines  
antilock brake, traction and stability control  
systems and helps the driver maintain directional  
control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.  
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive  
away, the system performs several diagnostic  
checks to ensure there are no problems. You may  
hear or feel the system working. This is normal  
and does not mean there is a problem with  
your vehicle. The system should initialize before  
the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In  
It will flash when the ESC system is both on and  
activated. You may also feel or hear the system  
working; this is normal.  
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE  
ESC or ESC OFF message is displayed, the  
system will not assist the driver maintain  
directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your  
driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 147.  
some cases, it may take approximately two miles  
of driving before the system initializes.  
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the  
ESC/TCS light will be on solid, and the ESC  
OFF or SERVICE ESC message will be displayed.  
For more information, see Driver Information  
on page 136.  
(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more  
information.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system  
automatically comes on whenever you start your  
vehicle. To assist the driver with vehicle directional  
control, especially in slippery road conditions,  
you should always leave the system on. You can  
turn ESC off if you ever need to.  
When the ESC system is turned off, the ESC OFF  
message will first appear, then the TRACTION  
OFF message and the ESC/TCS light will be  
on solid to warn the driver that both traction control  
and ESC are disabled.  
It is recommended to leave the system on for  
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary  
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck  
in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock”  
your vehicle to attempt to free it. See If Your  
on page 224. Also, see “Competitive Driving Mode”  
later in this section.  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system  
begins to assist the driver maintain directional  
control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash  
and the cruise control will automatically disengage.  
When road conditions allow you to use cruise  
again, you may re-engage the cruise control.  
See Cruise Control on page 115.  
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines  
that a problem exists with the system. The ESC  
OFF and SERVICE ESC messages and the  
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver  
that ESC is disabled and requires service. If  
the problem does not clear itself after restarting  
the vehicle, you should see your retailer for  
service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 147 for more information.  
The ESC/TCS button  
is located on the  
instrument panel.  
The traction control system can be turned off  
or back on by pressing the ESC/TCS button.  
To disable both traction control and ESC, press  
and hold the button briefly.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 233 for more information.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Competitive Driving Mode  
Steering  
The driver can select this optional handling mode  
by pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console  
two times within a five second time period.  
Power Steering  
If you lose power steering assist because the  
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you  
can steer but it will take much more effort.  
COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the DIC.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 147 for  
more information. Competitive Driving Mode allows  
the driver to have full control of the rear wheels  
while the ESC system helps maintain directional  
control of the vehicle by selective brake application.  
When Competitive Mode is selected, the traction  
control system will not be operating. Adjust your  
driving accordingly. This mode should only be used  
for driving in closed course or track driving venues.  
Steering Tips  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents  
mentioned on the news happen on curves.  
Here is why:  
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is  
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on  
curves. The traction of the tires against the road  
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change  
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is  
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the  
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a  
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.  
When you press the ESC button again, or restart the  
vehicle, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.  
Notice: When traction control is turned off,  
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is  
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift  
with the rear wheels spinning with a loss of  
traction, it is possible to cause damage to the  
transmission. Do not attempt to shift when the  
rear wheels do not have traction. Damage  
caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered.  
See your warranty book for additional  
information.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The traction you can get in a curve depends on  
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the  
angle at which the curve is banked, and your  
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the  
one factor you can control.  
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up  
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the  
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.  
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you  
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted  
speeds are based on good weather and road  
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will  
want to go slower.  
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.  
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both  
control systems — steering and braking — have  
to do their work where the tires meet the road.  
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,  
adding the hard braking can demand too much of  
those places. You can lose control.  
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach  
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while  
your front wheels are straight ahead.  
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”  
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady  
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of  
the curve, and then accelerate gently into  
the straightaway.  
The same thing can happen if you are steering  
through a sharp curve and you suddenly  
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering  
and acceleration — can overwhelm those  
places where the tires meet the road and make  
you lose control. See Traction Control System  
on page 201.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 233.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more  
effective than braking. For example, you come  
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,  
or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or  
a child darts out from between parked cars  
and stops right in front of you. You can avoid  
these problems by braking — if you can stop in  
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.  
That is the time for evasive action — steering  
around the problem.  
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies  
like these. First apply your brakes. See Braking  
on page 196. It is better to remove as much speed  
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer  
around the problem, to the left or right depending  
on the space available.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and  
a quick decision. If you are holding the steering  
wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock  
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very  
quickly without removing either hand. But you  
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly  
straighten the wheel once you have avoided  
the object.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive  
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
You may find that your right wheels have dropped  
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while  
you are driving.  
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a  
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,  
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then  
goes back into the right lane again. A simple  
maneuver?  
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a  
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,  
since the passing vehicle occupies the same  
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.  
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief  
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly  
put the passing driver face to face with the worst  
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.  
So here are some tips for passing:  
Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,  
and to crossroads for situations that might  
affect your passing patterns. If you have any  
doubt whatsoever about making a successful  
pass, wait for a better time.  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below  
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.  
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing  
in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the  
edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering  
wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front  
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your  
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and  
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might  
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your  
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is  
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is  
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of  
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road  
seems empty of approaching traffic.  
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow  
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that  
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull  
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to  
glance over your shoulder and check the  
blind spot.  
Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your  
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal  
before moving out of the right lane to pass.  
When you are far enough ahead of the passed  
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside  
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and  
move back into the right lane. Remember that  
your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is  
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem  
to be farther away from you than it really is.  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For  
one thing, following too closely reduces your  
area of vision, especially if you are following a  
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate  
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or  
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.  
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming  
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane  
and do not get too close. Time your move so  
you will be increasing speed as the time comes  
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to  
pass, you will have a running start that more  
than makes up for the distance you would lose  
by dropping back. And if something happens to  
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only  
slow down and drop back again and wait for  
another opportunity.  
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time  
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing  
the next vehicle.  
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too  
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not  
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting  
to turn.  
If you are being passed, make it easy for the  
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps  
you can ease a little to the right.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are  
best handled by easing your foot off the  
accelerator pedal.  
Loss of Control  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough  
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the  
driver has asked.  
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off  
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the  
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start  
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may  
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid  
if it occurs.  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to  
steer and constantly seek an escape route or  
area of less danger.  
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,  
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.  
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust  
your driving to these conditions. It is important  
to slow down on slippery surfaces because  
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control  
more limited.  
Skidding  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking  
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and  
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids  
are always possible.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,  
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,  
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by  
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could  
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the  
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.  
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as  
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to  
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when  
you have any doubt.  
The three types of skids correspond to your  
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,  
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or  
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a  
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.  
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle  
causes the driving wheels to spin.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
helps avoid only the braking skid.  
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.  
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so  
much road ahead.  
If the ABS is ever disabled, in a braking skid,  
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release  
enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels  
rolling again. This restores steering control.  
Push the brake pedal down steadily when you  
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are  
rolling, you will have steering control.  
In remote areas, watch for animals.  
If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe  
place and rest.  
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.  
But as we get older these differences increase.  
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as  
much light to see the same thing at night as a  
20-year-old.  
Driving at Night  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.  
One reason is that some drivers are likely to  
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night  
vision problems, or by fatigue.  
What you do in the daytime can also affect your  
night vision. For example, if you spend the  
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear  
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble  
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not  
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on  
glare from headlamps, but they also make a  
lot of things invisible.  
Here are some tips on night driving.  
Drive defensively.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the  
glare from headlamps behind you.  
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or  
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust  
to the dark.  
Since you cannot see as well, you may need  
to slow down and keep more space between  
you and other vehicles.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a  
driver who does not lower the high beams, or  
a vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a  
little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching  
headlamps.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your  
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is  
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even  
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused  
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and  
flash more than clean glass would, making the  
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.  
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a  
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your  
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly  
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be  
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your  
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer  
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim  
light — and are not even aware of it.  
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a  
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as  
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as  
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have  
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is  
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain  
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may  
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for  
driving on dry pavement.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.  
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good  
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see  
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,  
the edge of the road, and even people walking.  
Driving too fast through large water puddles or  
even going through some car washes can cause  
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.  
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow  
down before you hit them.  
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment  
in good shape and keep your windshield washer  
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your  
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs  
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield,  
or when strips of rubber start to separate from  
the inserts.  
Hydroplaning  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can  
build up under your tires that they can actually ride  
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet  
enough and you are going fast enough. When your  
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact  
with the road.  
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can  
if your tires do not have much tread or if the  
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if  
a lot of water is standing on the road. If you  
can see reflections from trees, telephone poles,  
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s  
surface, there could be hydroplaning.  
{CAUTION:  
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They  
may not work as well in a quick stop and  
may cause pulling to one side. You could  
lose control of the vehicle.  
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.  
There just is not a hard and fast rule about  
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down  
when it is raining.  
After driving through a large puddle of  
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal  
lightly until your brakes work normally.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Through Deep Standing Water  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep  
puddles or standing water, water can come in  
through your engine’s air intake and badly  
damage your engine. Never drive through water  
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your  
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or  
standing water, drive through them very slowly.  
As little as six inches of flowing water  
can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this  
happens, you and other vehicle occupants  
could drown. Do not ignore police warning  
signs, and otherwise be very cautious  
about trying to drive through flowing water.  
Driving Through Flowing Water  
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips  
{CAUTION:  
Besides slowing down, allow some extra  
following distance. And be especially careful  
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself  
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to  
have your view restricted by road spray.  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong  
forces. If you try to drive through flowing  
water, as you might at a low water  
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth.  
See Tires on page 284.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are ways to increase your safety in city  
driving:  
City Driving  
Know the best way to get to where you are  
going. Get a city map and plan your trip  
into an unknown part of the city just as you  
would for a cross-country trip.  
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross  
most large cities. You will save time and  
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 214.  
Treat a green light as a warning signal.  
A traffic light is there because the corner  
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns  
green, and just before you start to move,  
check both ways for vehicles that have not  
cleared the intersection or may be running  
the red light.  
One of the biggest problems with city streets is  
the amount of traffic on them. You will want  
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing  
and pay attention to traffic signals.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The most important advice on freeway driving  
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.  
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers  
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks  
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on  
a freeway as a passing lane.  
Freeway Driving  
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads  
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the  
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you  
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine  
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to  
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.  
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and  
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.  
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.  
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed  
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it  
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you  
want to pass.  
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,  
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or  
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.  
But they have their own special rules.  
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.  
Then use your turn signal.  
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly  
over your shoulder to make sure there is not  
another vehicle in your blind spot.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Once you are moving on the freeway, make  
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.  
Of course, you will find experienced and able  
service experts at Saturn retailers all across the  
United States and Canada. They will be ready  
and willing to help if you need it.  
Expect to move slightly slower at night.  
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the  
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your  
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and  
back up. Drive on to the next exit.  
Here are some things you can check before a trip:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?  
Are all windows clean inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?  
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite  
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce  
your speed according to your speedometer, not  
to your sense of motion. After driving for any  
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think  
you are going slower than you actually are.  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you  
checked all levels?  
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses  
clean?  
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,  
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for  
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated  
to the recommended pressure?  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.  
If you must start when you are not fresh — such  
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make  
too many miles that first part of the journey.  
Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can  
easily drive in.  
Weather Forecasts: What is the weather  
outlook along your route? Should you delay  
your trip a short time to avoid a major storm  
system?  
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?  
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it  
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it  
needs service, have it done before starting out.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Highway Hypnosis  
Hill and Mountain Roads  
Is there actually such a condition as highway  
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the  
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of  
awareness, or whatever.  
There is something about an easy stretch of road  
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the  
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the  
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make  
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,  
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a  
second, and you could crash and be injured.  
What can you do about highway hypnosis?  
First, be aware that it can happen.  
Then here are some tips:  
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with  
a comfortably cool interior.  
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead  
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors  
and your instruments frequently.  
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different  
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.  
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,  
service, or parking area and take a nap, get  
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat  
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are  
planning to visit there, here are some tips that  
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.  
{CAUTION:  
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all  
fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling  
system, and transmission. These parts can  
work hard on mountain roads.  
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with  
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes  
will have to do all the work of slowing  
down. They could get so hot that they  
would not work well. You would then have  
poor braking or even none going down a  
hill. You could crash. Always have your  
engine running and your vehicle in gear  
when you go downhill.  
{CAUTION:  
If you do not shift down, your brakes  
could get so hot that they would not work  
well. You would then have poor braking or  
even none going down a hill. You could  
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist  
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.  
Know how to go down hills. The most important  
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of  
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when  
you go down a steep or long hill.  
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift  
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help  
cool your engine and transmission, and you  
can climb the hill better.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane  
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide  
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at  
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.  
Winter Driving  
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There  
could be something in your lane, like a stalled  
car or an accident.  
You may see highway signs on mountains that  
warn of special problems. Examples are long  
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling  
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these  
and take appropriate action.  
Here are some tips for winter driving:  
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.  
You may want to put winter emergency  
supplies in your trunk.  
Also see Tires on page 284.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,  
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,  
some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a  
flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective  
warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under  
severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,  
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags  
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly  
secure these items in your vehicle.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Most of the time, those places where the tires  
meet the road probably have good traction.  
However, if there is snow or ice between the  
tires and the road, you can have a very slippery  
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or  
grip, and will need to be very careful.  
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold  
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.  
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it  
may offer the least traction of all. You can get  
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and  
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving  
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.  
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,  
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves your  
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery  
road. But you can turn the TCS off if you ever  
need to. You should turn the system off if  
If the ABS is ever disabled, if you feel your vehicle  
begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push  
the brake pedal down steadily to get the most  
traction you can.  
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224. Even though your  
vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving  
to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,  
you may want to turn the TCS off, such as  
when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,  
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.  
Allow greater following distance on any  
slippery road.  
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be  
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with  
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches  
may appear in shaded areas where the  
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps  
of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.  
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an  
overpass may remain icy when the  
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a  
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you  
are on it. Try not to brake while you are  
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering  
maneuvers.  
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your  
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop  
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,  
you will want to begin stopping sooner than  
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake  
System (ABS) on page 197.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard  
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could  
be in a serious situation. You should probably  
stay with your vehicle unless you know for  
sure that you are near help and you can hike  
through the snow. Here are some things to do  
to summon help and keep yourself and your  
passengers safe:  
Turn on your hazard flashers.  
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police  
that you have been stopped by the snow.  
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket  
around you. If you do not have blankets  
or extra clothing, make body insulators  
from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor  
mats — anything you can wrap around  
yourself or tuck under your clothing to  
keep warm.  
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be  
careful.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Run your engine only as long as you must. This  
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go  
a little faster than just idle. That is, push the  
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat  
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.  
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the  
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with  
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.  
{CAUTION:  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your  
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon  
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could  
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see  
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in  
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around  
the base of your vehicle, especially any  
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And  
check around again from time to time to be  
sure snow does not collect there.  
Then, shut the engine off and close the window  
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start  
the engine again and repeat this only when you  
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as  
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as  
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of  
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises  
every half hour or so until help comes.  
Open a window just a little on the side of  
the vehicle that is away from the wind.  
This will help keep CO out.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow  
{CAUTION:  
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,  
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not  
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method  
known as rocking can help you get out when  
you are stuck, but you must use caution.  
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high  
speed, they can explode, and you or others  
could be injured. And, the transmission or  
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.  
That could cause an engine compartment  
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,  
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not  
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)  
as shown on the speedometer.  
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy  
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires.  
If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting  
the transmission back and forth, you can  
destroy the transmission.  
For information about using tire chains on your  
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 303.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Loading Your Vehicle  
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.  
That will clear the area around the front wheels.  
If your vehicle has traction control, you should  
turn the traction control system off. See Traction  
Stability Control on page 201. Then shift back  
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward  
gear, or with a manual transmission between  
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),  
spinning the wheels as little as possible.  
It is very important to know how much weight  
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called  
the vehicle capacity weight and includes the  
weight of all occupants, cargo, and all  
nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your  
vehicle show how much weight it may properly  
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label  
and the Certification label.  
To prevent transmission wear, allow the wheels  
to stop spinning before shifting gears. Release  
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,  
parts on your vehicle can break, and it  
can change the way your vehicle handles.  
These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten  
the life of your vehicle.  
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the  
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning  
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,  
you will cause a rocking motion that may free  
your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle  
out after a few tries, it may need to be towed out.  
If your vehicle does need to be towed out, see  
Towing Your Vehicle on page 230.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows  
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and  
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).  
For more information on tires and inflation see  
on page 292.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
There is also important loading information on  
the vehicle Certification label. It tells you the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the  
front and rear axle. See “Certification Label”  
later in this section.  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
Label Example  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)  
of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,  
you will find the label attached below the door  
latch. This label shows the number of occupant  
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle  
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is  
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That  
weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated  
in Step 4.  
Example 1  
Description  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for Example 1 =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight @ 150 lbs  
(68 kg) x 1 =  
Available Occupant  
and Cargo Weight =  
Item  
Total  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
A
400 lbs (181 kg)  
B
C
150 lbs (68 kg)  
250 lbs (113 kg)  
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended  
to tow a trailer.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 2  
Description  
Example 3  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Item  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for Example 2 =  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for Example 3 =  
A
400 lbs (181 kg)  
A
400 lbs (181 kg)  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight @ 150 lbs  
(68 kg) x 2 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight @ 200 lbs  
(91 kg) x 2 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)  
100 lbs (45 kg)  
B
C
400 lbs (181 kg)  
0 lbs (0 kg)  
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading  
Information label for specific information about  
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating  
positions. The combined weight of the driver,  
passengers, and cargo should never exceed  
your vehicle’s capacity weight.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certification Label  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,  
parts on your vehicle can break, and it  
can change the way your vehicle handles.  
These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten  
the life of your vehicle.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached  
to the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you  
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,  
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).  
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,  
all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed  
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or  
rear axle.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you put things inside your vehicle — like  
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything  
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.  
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is  
a crash, they will keep going.  
Towing  
Towing Your Vehicle  
Consult your retailer or a professional towing  
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle  
page 359.  
{CAUTION:  
Things you put inside your vehicle can  
strike and injure people in a sudden stop  
or turn, or in a crash.  
Put things in the rear area of your  
vehicle. Try to spread the weight  
evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like  
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that  
some of them are above the tops of  
the seats.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your  
vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle.  
Always put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.  
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to  
be towed with any of its wheels on the ground.  
If your vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your  
Vehicle” earlier in this section.  
Do not leave an unsecured child  
Towing a Trailer  
restraint in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to  
tow a trailer.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When you add non-Saturn accessories to your  
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance  
and safety, including such things as, airbags,  
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions  
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic  
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,  
and stability control. Some of these accessories  
may even cause malfunction or damage not  
covered by warranty.  
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best  
and wants you to be happy with it. We hope  
you will go to your retailer for all your service  
needs. You will get genuine Saturn parts  
and Saturn-trained and supported service people.  
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn  
vehicle all Saturn.  
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.  
Saturn accessories are designed to complement  
and function with other systems on your  
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize  
your vehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.  
When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask  
for Saturn accessories, you will know that  
Saturn-trained and supported service technicians  
will perform the work using genuine Saturn  
accessories.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Proposition 65 Warning  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain  
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of  
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and  
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many  
fluids, and some component wear by-products  
contain and/or emit these chemicals.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,  
and other fasteners. English and metric  
fasteners can be easily confused. If you  
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later  
break or fall off. You could be hurt.  
If you want to do some of your own service work,  
you will want to use the proper service manual.  
It tells you much more about how to service your  
vehicle than this manual can. To order the  
proper service manual, see Service Publications  
Ordering Information on page 369.  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
{CAUTION:  
You can be injured and your vehicle could  
be damaged if you try to do service work  
on a vehicle without knowing enough  
about it.  
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before  
attempting to do your own service work, see  
on page 54.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement  
parts, and tools before you attempt  
any vehicle maintenance task.  
You should keep a record with all parts receipts  
and list the mileage and the date of any service  
work you perform. See Maintenance Record  
on page 349.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding Equipment to the Outside  
of Your Vehicle  
Gasoline Octane  
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted  
octane rating of 91 or higher. You may also  
use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane  
or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may  
be slightly reduced, and you may notice a slight  
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to  
as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87,  
you may notice a heavy knocking noise when  
you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated  
at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.  
Otherwise, you might damage your engine.  
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane  
or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your  
engine needs service.  
Things you might add to the outside of your  
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may  
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer  
performance. Check with your retailer before  
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.  
Fuel  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important  
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.  
To help keep your engine clean and maintain  
optimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommends  
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER  
Detergent Gasoline.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.  
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saturn  
retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that  
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,  
repairs may not be covered by your warranty.  
Gasoline Specifications  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM  
specification D 4814 in the United States or  
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may  
contain an octane-enhancing additive called  
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT). Saturn recommends against the use  
of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives  
on page 236 for additional information.  
Additives  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the  
United States are now required to contain additives  
that will help prevent engine and fuel system  
deposits from forming, allowing your emission  
control system to work properly. In most cases,  
you should not have to add anything to your  
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the  
minimum amount of additive required to meet  
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.  
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves  
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due  
to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that  
is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
Also, your retailer has additives that will help  
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.  
California Fuel  
If your vehicle is certified to meet California  
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate  
on fuels that meet California specifications.  
See the underhood emission control label.  
If this fuel is not available in states adopting  
California emissions standards, your vehicle  
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting  
federal specifications, but emission control  
system performance may be affected. The  
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on  
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers  
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may  
be available in your area. We recommend that  
you use these gasolines if they comply with  
the specifications described earlier. However,  
E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more  
than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles  
that were not designed for those fuels.  
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.  
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of  
spark plugs and the performance of the emission  
control system may be affected. The malfunction  
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return  
to your retailer for service.  
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for  
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use  
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal  
parts in your fuel system and also damage  
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage  
would not be covered under your warranty.  
If you plan on driving in another country outside  
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may  
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or  
any other fuel not recommended in the previous  
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of  
improper fuel would not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing  
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese  
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you  
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business  
in the country where you will be driving.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Filling the Tank  
{CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire  
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid  
injuries to you and others, read and follow  
all the instructions on the pump island.  
Turn off your engine when you are  
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near  
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep  
sparks, flames, and smoking materials  
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel  
pump unattended when refueling your  
vehicle. This is against the law in some  
places. Keep children away from the  
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.  
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged  
fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle.  
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly  
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;  
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back  
to the right.  
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from  
the hook on the fuel door.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).  
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel  
cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 147 for more information.  
{CAUTION:  
If you spill fuel and then something ignites  
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can  
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap  
too quickly. This spray can happen if your  
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in  
hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly  
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then  
unscrew the cap all the way.  
{CAUTION:  
If a fire starts while you are refueling,  
do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the  
flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or  
by notifying the station attendant. Leave  
the area immediately.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill  
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have  
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.  
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as  
possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 318.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to  
get the right type. Your retailer can get one  
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit  
properly. This may cause your malfunction  
indicator lamp to light and may damage  
your fuel tank and emissions system. See  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it  
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The  
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has  
been left off or improperly installed. This would  
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.  
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is  
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge  
from the container can ignite the gasoline  
vapor. You can be badly burned and your  
vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help  
avoid injury to you and others:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up  
and injure you even when the engine is not  
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
Dispense gasoline only into approved  
containers.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside  
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup  
bed, or on any surface other than the  
ground.  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with  
the inside of the fill opening before  
operating the nozzle. Contact should  
be maintained until the filling is  
complete.  
{CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine  
parts and start a fire. These include  
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,  
windshield washer and other fluids, and  
plastic or rubber. You or others could be  
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill  
things that will burn onto a hot engine.  
Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
2. Pull down on the  
rear edge of the  
lever to release  
the hood latch.  
To open the hood, do the following:  
1. Locate the interior  
hood release lever.  
It is located below  
the instrument panel  
on the driver’s side  
of the vehicle.  
3. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on  
the rear edge of the hood, near the windshield  
to open the hood.  
Notice: Closing the hood with the doors open  
may damage the hood and/or doors. Always  
close the doors before closing the hood.  
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps  
are on properly. Then, pull the hood down and  
close it firmly.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Compartment Overview  
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you will see:  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See  
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield  
Washer Fluid on page 267.  
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add  
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 245.  
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See  
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.  
Power Steering Fluid on page 266.  
See Cooling System on page 260.  
H. Remote Negative () Ground (Out of View).  
C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See  
“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 268  
and Hydraulic Clutch on page 254.  
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See  
“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil  
on page 245.  
See Jump Starting on page 272.  
I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 271.  
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump  
Starting on page 272.  
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood  
Fuse Block on page 328.  
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 252.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See  
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield  
Washer Fluid on page 267.  
Engine Oil  
Checking Engine Oil  
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.  
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time  
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,  
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be  
on level ground.  
See Cooling System on page 260.  
C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See  
“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 268  
and Hydraulic Clutch on page 254.  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.  
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.  
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine  
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 245.  
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 252.  
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several  
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you  
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not  
show the actual level.  
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 245.  
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See  
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper  
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the  
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down  
and check the level.  
Power Steering Fluid on page 266.  
H. Remote Negative () Ground (Out of View).  
See Jump Starting on page 272.  
I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 271.  
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump  
Starting on page 272.  
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood  
Fuse Block on page 328.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When to Add Engine Oil  
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, you  
will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.  
But you must use the right kind. This section  
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine  
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and  
Specifications on page 331.  
2.4L L4 Engine  
2.0L L4 Engine  
for the location of the engine oil fill cap.  
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level  
somewhere in the proper operating range.  
Push the dipstick all the way back in when  
you are through.  
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the  
engine has so much oil that the oil level  
gets above the upper mark that shows the  
proper operating range, the engine could  
be damaged.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this  
GM standard. You should look for and use only  
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
For Vehicles With the 2.0L L4 Engine  
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the  
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause  
engine damage not covered by your warranty.  
SAE 5W-30  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30  
is best for your vehicle.  
These numbers on an oil container show  
its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other  
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should  
also have the starburst  
symbol on the container.  
This symbol indicates  
that the oil has been  
certified by the  
Look for two things:  
GM4718M  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil  
meeting GM Standard GM4718M, such as  
Mobil 1® or equivalent. Oils meeting this  
standard may be identified as synthetic.  
You should look for this on the oil container, and  
use only those oils that are identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst  
symbol on the front of the oil container.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with  
a synthetic oil which meets all requirements  
for your vehicle.  
For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 Engine  
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to  
maintain engine oil level, oil meeting GM  
Standard GM4718M may not be available.  
You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30  
with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.  
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M  
should not be used for an oil change.  
Look for two things:  
GM6094M  
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for  
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard  
GM6094M.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as  
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing  
the American Petroleum Institute Certified  
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure  
to use the recommended oil can result in  
engine damage not covered by your warranty.  
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements  
for your vehicle.  
SAE 5W-30  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30  
is best for your vehicle.  
These numbers on an oil container show its  
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other  
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should  
also have the starburst  
symbol on the container.  
This symbol indicates  
that the oil has been  
certified by the  
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where  
the temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is  
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30  
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will  
provide easier cold starting and better protection  
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
Engine Oil Additives  
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended  
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM  
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for  
good performance and engine protection.  
You should look for this information on the oil  
container, and use only those oils that are  
identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M  
and have the starburst symbol on the front of  
the oil container.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your retailer has trained service people who will  
perform this work using genuine Saturn parts and  
reset the system. It is also important to check your  
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Engine Oil Life System  
When to Change Engine Oil  
Your vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System,  
a computer system that lets you know when to  
change the engine oil and filter. This is based  
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and  
not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the  
mileage at which an oil change will be indicated  
can vary considerably. For the oil life system  
to work properly, you must reset the system every  
time the oil is changed.  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must  
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since  
the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life  
system whenever the oil is changed.  
How to Reset the Engine Oil  
Life System  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when  
to change your engine oil and filter based  
on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset  
the system so it can calculate when the next oil  
change is required. If a situation occurs where you  
change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON  
message being turned on, reset the system.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has  
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change  
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message  
on page 147. Change the oil as soon as possible  
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible  
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,  
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil  
change is necessary for over a year. However, the  
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once  
a year and at this time the system must be reset.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After changing the engine oil, the system must be  
reset as follows:  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that  
may be unhealthy for your skin and could  
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on  
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails  
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.  
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags  
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s  
warnings about the use and disposal of oil  
products.  
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.  
2. Press the information and reset buttons  
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) at  
the same time to enter the personalization  
on page 152.  
3. Press the information button to scroll through  
the available personalization menu modes  
until the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from  
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by  
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into  
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,  
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used  
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of  
used oil, ask your retailer, a service station, or a  
local recycling center for help.  
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC  
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will  
tell you the system has been reset.  
5. Turn the key to LOCK.  
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back  
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil  
life system has not reset. Repeat the reset  
procedure.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
2.0L L4 Engine  
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.  
2.4L L4 Engine  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When to Inspect the Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter  
{CAUTION:  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter element at each  
scheduled Maintenance II service interval and  
replace the air cleaner/filter element at the  
first oil change after 50,000 miles (85 000 km).  
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,  
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.  
Operating the engine with the air  
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others  
to be burned. The air cleaner not only  
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if  
the engine backfires. If it is not there  
and the engine backfires, you could be  
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be  
careful working on the engine with the  
air cleaner/filter off.  
How to Inspect the Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter  
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to  
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains  
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire  
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt  
can easily get into your engine, which will  
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter  
in place when you are driving.  
To inspect or replace the filter, open the clamps  
that hold the cover on and lift off the cover.  
Be sure to reinstall the cover tightly.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid  
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only  
reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your  
vehicle to a Saturn retailer and have it repaired as  
soon as possible.  
It is not necessary to check the manual  
transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is  
the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,  
take the vehicle to a Saturn retailer for service.  
Have it repaired as soon as possible. You  
may also have your fluid level checked by your  
Saturn retailer when you have your oil changed.  
page 345 for the proper fluid to use.  
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in  
the Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 336. Be sure to use the  
transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants on page 345.  
Hydraulic Clutch  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic  
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,  
and the damages may not be covered by  
your warranty. Always use the automatic  
transmission fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 345.  
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is  
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own  
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master  
cylinder reservoir.  
See Brakes on page 268 for more information.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Help keep the proper engine temperature.  
Let the warning lights and gages work as they  
should.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is  
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years  
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever  
occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended  
life coolant.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®  
may cause premature engine, heater core,  
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine  
coolant may require changing sooner, at  
the first maintenance service after each  
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,  
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always use  
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your  
vehicle.  
The following explains your cooling system and  
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have  
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine  
Overheating on page 258.  
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant will:  
Give freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C).  
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protect against rust and corrosion.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you use an improper coolant  
mixture, your engine could overheat and be  
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be  
covered by your warranty. Too much water  
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,  
radiator, heater core, and other parts.  
What to Use  
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water  
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will  
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant  
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.  
If you have to add coolant more than four times  
a year, have your retailer check your cooling  
system.  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or  
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,  
you could damage your vehicle. Use only  
the proper mixture of the engine coolant  
listed in this manual for the cooling system.  
on page 345 for more information.  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can  
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.  
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is  
set for the proper coolant mixture. With  
plain water or the wrong mixture, your  
engine could get too hot but you would  
not get the overheat warning. Your engine  
could catch fire and you or others could  
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Coolant  
{CAUTION:  
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when  
the engine and radiator are hot can allow  
steam and scalding liquids to blow out  
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge  
tank pressure cap — even a little — when  
the engine and radiator are hot.  
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When  
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be  
at the COLD FILL line.  
Do not overfill the surge tank. Too much coolant  
can result in an overflow condition when the  
fluid is hot.  
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine  
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.  
for more information on location.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Coolant  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
If you need more coolant, add the proper  
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surge  
tank, but only when the engine is cool. If the  
coolant surge tank is empty, a special fill  
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating  
on page 258 for instructions on “How to Add  
Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly  
installed, coolant loss and possible engine  
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly  
and tightly secured.  
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully  
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 242 for more  
information on location.  
{CAUTION:  
Engine Overheating  
You can be burned if you spill coolant  
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains  
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the  
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill  
coolant on a hot engine.  
There is an engine coolant temperature warning  
light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See  
on page 137 for more information.  
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it  
is hand-tight and fully seated.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine  
If No Steam Is Coming From  
Your Engine  
An engine coolant temperature warning can  
indicate a serious problem. See Engine Coolant  
{CAUTION:  
Steam from an overheated engine can  
burn you badly, even if you just open the  
hood. Stay away from the engine if you  
see or hear steam coming from it. Just  
turn it off and get everyone away from  
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until  
there is no sign of steam or coolant  
before you open the hood.  
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,  
but see or hear no steam, the problem may not  
be too serious. Sometimes the engine can  
get a little too hot when you:  
Climb a long hill on a hot day.  
Stop after high-speed driving.  
Idle for long periods in traffic.  
If you keep driving when your engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.  
You or others could be badly burned.  
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get  
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.  
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning  
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:  
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.  
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in  
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to  
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)  
or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.  
Notice: If your engine catches fire because  
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle  
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan  
speed and open the windows as necessary.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you no longer have the overheat warning,  
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for  
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not  
come back on, you can drive normally.  
Cooling System  
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is  
what you will see:  
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,  
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.  
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle  
the engine for three minutes while you are parked.  
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine  
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it  
cools down.  
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get  
service help right away.  
2.4L L4 Engine  
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)  
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the  
hood can start up even when the engine  
is not running and can injure you. Keep  
hands, clothing, and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is  
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.  
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.  
2.0L L4 Engine  
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap  
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.  
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap  
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,  
water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®  
may cause premature engine, heater core,  
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine  
coolant could require changing sooner,  
at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,  
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always use  
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your  
vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other  
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not  
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.  
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  
Surge Tank  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.  
If you run the engine, it could lose all  
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,  
and you could be burned. Get any leak  
fixed before you drive the vehicle.  
Notice: Your engine has a specific cooling  
system drain and fill procedure. Failure  
to follow this procedure could cause your  
engine to overheat and be severely damaged.  
If your engine’s cooling system needs to  
be drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.  
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,  
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan  
are running. If the engine is overheating, the fan  
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle  
needs service.  
If you have not found a problem yet, check to  
see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.  
Notice: Engine damage from running your  
engine without coolant is not covered by your  
warranty.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at  
the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the  
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,  
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is  
cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on  
page 255 for more information.  
{CAUTION:  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can  
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.  
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is  
set for the proper coolant mixture. With  
plain water or the wrong mixture, your  
engine could get too hot but you would  
not get the overheat warning. Your engine  
could catch fire and you or others could  
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,  
add coolant as follows:  
{CAUTION:  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot  
cooling system can blow out and burn  
you badly. They are under pressure, and if  
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure  
cap — even a little — they can come out at  
high speed. Never turn the cap when the  
cooling system, including the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for  
the cooling system and coolant surge  
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have  
to turn the pressure cap.  
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and  
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and  
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and  
the proper coolant mixture.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Then keep  
turning the  
pressure  
{CAUTION:  
cap slowly,  
and remove it.  
You can be burned if you spill coolant  
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains  
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the  
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill  
coolant on a hot engine.  
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap  
when the cooling system, including the  
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper  
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the  
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about  
two or two and one-half turns. If you hear  
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow  
any pressure still left to be vented out  
the discharge hose.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,  
start the engine and let it run until you can  
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.  
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower  
than the COLD FILL line, add more of the  
proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until  
the level reaches the COLD FILL line.  
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the  
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.  
See your retailer, if necessary.  
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper  
mixture, to the COLD FILL line. Wait about  
five minutes, then check to see if the level  
is below the COLD FILL line. If the level  
is below the line, add additional coolant to  
bring the level up to the line. Repeat this  
procedure until the level remains constant at  
the COLD FILL line for at least five minutes.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Check Power Steering Fluid  
Power Steering Fluid  
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:  
1. Turn the key off and let the engine  
compartment cool down.  
on page 242  
for reservoir  
location.  
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.  
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a  
clean rag.  
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.  
5. Remove the cap again and look at the  
fluid level on the dipstick.  
The level should be between the COLD and  
HOT marks. If necessary, add only enough fluid  
to bring the level up to the COLD mark.  
When to Check Power Steering Fluid  
It is not necessary to regularly check power  
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a  
leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise.  
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a  
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.  
What to Use  
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see  
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the  
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses  
and seals.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
When using concentrated washer fluid,  
follow the manufacturer’s instructions  
for adding water.  
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure  
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before  
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area  
where the temperature may fall below freezing,  
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against  
freezing.  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer  
fluid. Water can cause the solution to  
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank  
and other parts of the washer system.  
Also, water does not clean as well  
as washer fluid.  
Adding Washer Fluid  
Fill your washer fluid tank only  
three-quarters full when it is very cold.  
This allows for expansion if freezing  
occurs, which could damage the tank if  
it is completely full.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it.  
Add washer fluid  
until the tank is full. See  
Overview on page 242  
for reservoir location.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in  
your windshield washer. It can damage  
your washer system and paint.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake/clutch  
fluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If you  
add fluid when your brake linings are worn, then  
you will have too much fluid when you get  
new brake linings. You should add or remove  
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on  
the brake/clutch hydraulic system.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
Your brake master  
cylinder reservoir is  
filled with DOT-3 brake  
fluid. See Engine  
on page 242 for the  
location of the reservoir.  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it  
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn  
if the engine is hot enough. You or others  
could be burned, and your vehicle could  
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when  
work is done on the brake and/or clutch  
hydraulic system.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid  
level in the reservoir might go down. The first  
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable  
level during normal brake lining wear. When  
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back  
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of  
the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system. If it  
is, you should have your brake and/or clutch  
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or  
later your brakes and/or clutch will not work  
well, or will not work at all.  
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your  
brake warning light will come on. See Brake  
System Warning Light on page 134.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
What to Add  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage  
brake/clutch system parts. For example,  
just a few drops of mineral-based oil,  
such as engine oil, in the brake/clutch  
hydraulic system can damage brake/clutch  
system parts so badly that they will  
have to be replaced. Do not let someone  
put in the wrong kind of fluid.  
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3  
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed  
container only. See Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants on page 345.  
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and  
the area around the cap before removing it. This  
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.  
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s  
painted surfaces, the paint finish can  
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake  
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it  
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle  
on page 318.  
{CAUTION:  
With the wrong kind of fluid in the  
brake/clutch system, the brakes/clutch  
may not work well, or they may not even  
work at all. This could cause a crash.  
Always use the proper brake fluid.  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a  
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied  
or lightly applied. This does not mean something  
is wrong with your brakes.  
Brake Wear  
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.  
Front disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators  
that make a high-pitched warning sound when  
the brake pads are worn and new pads are  
needed. The sound may come and go or be heard  
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when  
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,  
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten  
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to Saturn  
torque specifications.  
Brake linings should always be replaced as  
complete axle sets.  
{CAUTION:  
Brake Pedal Travel  
The brake wear warning sound means  
that soon the brakes will not work well.  
That could lead to an accident. When  
you hear the brake wear warning sound,  
have your vehicle serviced.  
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return  
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase  
in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake  
trouble.  
Brake Adjustment  
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without  
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out  
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
Battery  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.  
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work  
well together if the vehicle is to have really good  
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested  
with top-quality Saturn brake parts. When you  
replace parts of your braking system — for  
example, when your brake linings wear down  
and you need new ones put in — be sure you  
get new approved Saturn replacement parts.  
If you do not, your brakes may no longer work  
properly. For example, if someone puts in  
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,  
the balance between your front and rear brakes  
can change — for the worse. The braking  
performance you have come to expect can  
change in many other ways if someone puts in  
the wrong replacement brake parts.  
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.  
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has  
the replacement number shown on the original  
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®  
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment  
Overview on page 242 for battery location.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California  
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Storage  
Jump Starting  
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for  
25 days or more, remove the black, negative ()  
cable from the battery. This will help keep  
your battery from running down.  
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may  
want to use another vehicle and some jumper  
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use  
the following steps to do it safely.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and  
gas that can explode. You can be badly  
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump  
Starting on page 272 for tips on working  
around a battery without getting hurt.  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be  
dangerous because:  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode  
or ignite.  
They contain enough electricity to  
burn you.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly,  
some or all of these things can hurt you.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in  
costly damage to your vehicle that would  
not be covered by your warranty.  
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,  
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles  
involved in the jump start procedure. Put  
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a  
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before  
setting the parking brake.  
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or  
pulling it will not work, and it could damage  
your vehicle.  
Notice: If you leave your radio or other  
accessories on during the jump starting  
procedure, they could be damaged. The  
repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Always turn off your radio and  
other accessories when jump starting  
your vehicle.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a  
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.  
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not  
a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both  
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles  
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to  
jump start your vehicle.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.  
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged  
into the cigarette lighter or the accessory  
power outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps  
that are not needed. This will avoid sparks  
and help save both batteries. And it could  
save the radio!  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper  
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are  
not touching each other. If they are, it could  
cause a ground connection you do not  
want. You would not be able to start your  
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage  
the electrical systems.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and  
locate the positive (+) and negative ()  
terminal locations on that vehicle.  
The remote negative ()  
ground bracket is  
located in the rear of  
the engine compartment,  
on the passenger’s side  
of the vehicle, and is  
marked GND ().  
You will not need to access your battery for  
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote  
positive (+) and a remote negative () jump  
starting terminal.  
The remote positive (+)  
terminal is located  
under a red plastic  
cover on the engine  
compartment fuse block.  
Open the cover to  
page 242 for more information on the location  
of the positive (+) and negative () terminals  
on your vehicle.  
access the terminal.  
{CAUTION:  
An electric fan can start up even when the  
engine is not running and can injure you.  
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from  
any underhood electric fan.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause  
battery gas to explode. People have been  
hurt doing this, and some have been  
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need  
more light.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can  
injure you badly. Keep your hands away  
from moving parts once the engine is  
running.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have  
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you  
could get a shock. The vehicles could  
be damaged too.  
Be sure the battery has enough water.  
You do not need to add water to the  
battery installed in your new vehicle. But  
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the  
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,  
add water to take care of that first. If you  
don’t, explosive gas could be present.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
basic things you should know. Positive (+)  
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)  
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ()  
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine  
part or to a remote negative () terminal if the  
vehicle has one.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative ()  
or you will get a short that would damage the  
battery and maybe other parts too. And do  
not connect the negative () cable to the  
negative () terminal on the dead battery  
because this can cause sparks.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can  
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you  
accidentally get it in your eyes or on  
your skin, flush the place with water  
and get medical help immediately.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the  
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle  
with the dead battery. Use a remote  
positive (+) terminal.  
9. Connect the other end of the negative ()  
cable to the negative () terminal location  
on the vehicle with the dead battery.  
Your vehicle has a remote negative ()  
ground bracket for this purpose. See Engine  
Compartment Overview Engine Compartment  
Overview on page 242 for more information  
on the location of the remote positive (+) and  
remote negative () terminals.  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal.  
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of  
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)  
terminal if the vehicle has one.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable  
to the negative () terminal of the good  
battery. Use a remote negative () terminal  
if the vehicle has one.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery  
and run the engine for a while.  
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead  
battery. If it will not start after a few tries,  
it probably needs service.  
Do not let the other end touch anything  
until the next step. The other end of the  
negative () cable does not go to the dead  
battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted  
metal engine part or to a remote negative ()  
terminal on the vehicle with the dead  
battery.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected  
or removed in the wrong order, electrical  
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Always connect and remove  
the jumper cables in the correct order, making  
sure that the cables do not touch each other  
or other metal.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both  
vehicles, do the following:  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from  
the vehicle that had the dead battery.  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from  
the vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
other vehicle.  
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its  
original position.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or  
Remote Negative () Terminal  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and  
Remote Negative () Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug  
hole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add  
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise  
the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.  
Rear Axle  
When to Check Lubricant  
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle  
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear  
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a  
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.  
What to Use  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine  
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 345.  
How to Check Lubricant  
Headlamp Aiming  
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and  
should need no further adjustment.  
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the  
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to  
the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if it  
is difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontal  
aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beam  
headlamps at you (for vertical aim). If you  
believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we  
recommend that you take your vehicle to your  
retailer for service.  
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be  
on a level surface.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamps and Parking Lamps  
Bulb Replacement  
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement  
Bulbs on page 283.  
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in  
this section, contact your retailer.  
Halogen Bulbs  
{CAUTION:  
A. High-beam Headlamp  
B. Low-beam Headlamp  
C. Parking Lamp  
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas  
inside and can burst if you drop or  
scratch the bulb. You or others could be  
injured. Be sure to read and follow the  
instructions on the bulb package.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release  
Front Turn Signal, Parking and  
Fog Lamps  
on page 241 for more information.  
A. Front Turn Signal/  
Parking Lamp  
B. Fog Lamp  
2. Remove the bulb access cover from the bulb  
(high or low-beam only) you need to change.  
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and  
pull it from the headlamp assembly.  
page 241 for more information.  
2. Reach underneath the front bumper and  
locate the bulb assembly.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and  
pull out the bulb assembly.  
4. Disconnect the bulb socket from the electrical  
connector.  
5. Install a new bulb.  
4. Remove the electrical connector from the  
bulb socket.  
5. Holding the base of the socket, pull the old  
bulb from the socket.  
6. Install a new bulb.  
7. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall.  
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.  
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise  
to remove.  
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps  
and Sidemarker Lamps  
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:  
6. Pull the bulb from the socket.  
7. Install a new bulb.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68  
for more information.  
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp  
assembly.  
2. Remove the two screws, which hold the  
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.  
3. Pull the taillamp assembly upwards and  
sideways to disengage it from the vehicle.  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Back-Up Lamps  
License Plate Lamp  
To replace the license plate lamp bulb, do the  
following:  
2ad ute ee aao
through the fascia opening.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and  
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.  
4. Install the new bulb.  
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the  
lamp assembly.  
The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.  
To replace a bulb, do the following:  
1. Reach behind, up and under the rear bumper  
and locate the bulb socket.  
2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the  
bulb assembly.  
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.  
4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.  
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs  
in the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to  
secure it.  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacement Bulbs  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for  
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 336 for more information.  
Replacement blades come in different types and  
are removed in different ways. For proper type and  
Parts on page 347.  
Exterior Lamp  
Bulb Number  
3157K  
Back-Up, Stoplamp,  
Taillamp and Turn Signal  
Fog Lamp  
H11  
Front Parking Lamp  
(In Headlamp Assembly)  
W5W-B50X2  
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp  
(Below Headlamp Assembly)  
5702KA  
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp  
License Plate Lamp  
Headlamps  
194  
168  
High-Beam  
H9  
Low-Beam  
H11  
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact  
your retailer.  
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly  
do the following:  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires  
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever  
have questions about your tire warranty and where  
to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty  
booklet for details. For additional information refer  
to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with  
your vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage  
the hook and push the wiper arm (A) out  
of the blade (C).  
Overloading your vehicle’s tires can  
cause overheating as a result of too  
much friction. You could have an  
air-out and a serious accident. See  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.  
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the  
wiper arm until you hear the release lever  
click into place.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If your vehicle has P245/45R18 size  
tires, they are classified as low-profile  
tires. Low-profile tires are more susceptible  
to damage from road hazards or curb impact  
than standard profile tires. Tire and or  
wheel assembly damage can occur when  
coming into contact with road hazards like,  
potholes or sharp edged objects or when  
sliding into a curb. Your Saturn Warranty does  
not cover this type of damage. Keep tires  
set to the correct inflation pressure and when  
possible avoid contact with curbs, potholes,  
and other road hazards.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Underinflated tires pose the same  
danger as overloaded tires. The  
resulting accident could cause serious  
injury. Check all tires frequently to  
maintain the recommended pressure.  
Tire pressure should be checked when  
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See  
Overinflated tires are more likely to  
be cut, punctured, or broken by a  
sudden impact — such as when  
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the  
recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.  
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or  
if your vehicle’s tires have been  
damaged, replace them.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See your retailer for details regarding winter tire  
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see  
Buying New Tires on page 296.  
Winter Tires  
If your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires,  
they are classified as low-profile performance  
tires. These tires are designed for very responsive  
driving on wet or dry pavement. If you expect to  
drive on snow or ice covered roads often, you  
may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.  
The low-profile performance tires may not offer  
the traction you would like or the same level  
of performance as winter tires on snow or ice  
covered roads.  
If you choose to use winter tires:  
Use tires of the same brand and tread type  
on all four wheel positions.  
Use only radial ply tires of the same size,  
load range, and speed rating as the original  
equipment tires.  
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your  
original equipment tires may not be available for H,  
V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose  
winter tires with a lower speed rating, never  
exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.  
Winter tires, in general, are designed for  
increased traction on snow and ice covered  
roads. With winter tires, there may be decreased  
dry road traction, increased road noise and  
shorter tire tread life. After switching to winter  
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling  
and braking.  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have  
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all  
federal safety guidelines.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into its  
sidewall. The example below shows a typical  
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire  
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows  
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and  
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded  
onto both sides of the tire, although only one  
side may have the date of manufacture.  
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example  
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s  
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and  
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration  
later in this section for more detail.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):  
Tire manufacturers are required to grade  
tires based on three performance factors:  
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.  
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality  
Grading on page 299.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall  
to sidewall.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that  
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.  
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,  
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean  
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as  
it is wide.  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used  
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.  
The letter R means radial ply construction; the  
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;  
and the letter B means belted-bias ply  
construction.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example of a  
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.  
(F) Service Description: These characters  
represent the load range and speed rating of the  
tire. The load index represents the load carry  
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index  
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is  
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a  
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.  
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States  
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P  
as the first character in the tire size means a  
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards  
set by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure  
in a tire, measured in pounds per square  
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has  
built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 292.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire  
pressing outward on each square inch of the  
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor  
vehicle with standard and optional equipment  
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and  
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined  
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of  
optional accessories are, automatic transmission/  
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power  
windows, power seats, and air conditioning.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall  
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)  
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code  
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),  
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,  
and date of production.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height  
to its width.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is  
located between the plies and the tread. Cords  
may be made from steel or other reinforcing  
materials.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped  
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.  
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the  
plies are laid at alternate angles less than  
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward  
when mounted on a vehicle.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied  
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 225.  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating  
positions.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger  
vehicles.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that  
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears  
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,  
and/or model name molding that is higher  
or deeper than the same moldings on the other  
sidewall of the tire.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from  
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum  
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.  
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the  
sidewall.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and  
multipurpose vehicles.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire  
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure  
for that tire.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation  
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See  
Your Vehicle on page 225.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of  
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity  
weight, and production options weight.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the  
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at  
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Standards): A tire information system that  
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s  
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings  
are determined by tire manufacturers using  
government testing procedures. The ratings are  
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform  
Tire Quality Grading on page 299.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which  
the tire beads are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread  
and the bead.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of  
designated seating positions multiplied by  
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.  
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned  
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at  
which a tire can operate.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the  
road surface. The amount of grip provided.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on  
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory  
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into  
contact with the road.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached  
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity  
weight and the original equipment tire size and  
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire  
and Loading Information Label” under Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 225.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of  
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread  
on page 296.  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached  
to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below  
the driver’s door latch. This label shows your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct  
inflation pressures for your tires when they  
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation  
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum  
amount of air pressure needed to support  
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.  
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air  
(under-inflation), you can get the following:  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
Reduced fuel economy  
For additional information regarding how much  
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example  
of the Tire and Loading Information label,  
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 225. How you  
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and  
ride comfort, never load your vehicle with more  
weight than it was designed to carry.  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Needless damage from road hazards  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to  
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire  
inflation pressure matches the recommended  
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information  
label, no further adjustment is necessary.  
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you  
reach the recommended amount.  
When to Check  
Check your tires once a month or more.  
How to Check  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check  
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are  
properly inflated simply by looking at them.  
Radial tires may look properly inflated even  
when they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s  
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.  
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for  
at least three hours or driven no more than  
1 mile (1.6 km).  
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on  
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.  
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out  
dirt and moisture.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km).  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your  
tires as soon as possible and check wheel  
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.  
and Wheel Replacement on page 300 for  
more information.  
Non-Directional Tires  
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve  
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.  
The first rotation is the most important. See  
Scheduled Maintenance on page 336.  
When rotating Goodyear Eagle RSA P245/45R18  
non-directional tires, always use the correct  
rotation pattern shown here.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front  
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 225 for an example of  
the Tire and Loading Information label and  
its location on your vehicle. Make certain that all  
wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel  
on page 331.  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel could  
come off and cause a crash. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt  
from places where the wheel attaches to  
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use  
a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be  
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,  
if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.  
Directional Tires  
If your vehicle has Goodyear Eagle F1-GS1  
P245/45R18 size tires, they are directional  
tires and must roll in a certain direction for the  
best overall performance. The direction is shown  
by an arrow on the tire sidewall. Because  
these tires are directional, they should be rotated  
as shown here. These tires should only be  
moved from front to rear and rear to front on  
the same side of the vehicle.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
Buying New Tires  
One way to tell when it  
Saturn has developed and matched specific tires  
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires  
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,  
were designed to meet General Motors Tire  
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)  
system rating. If you need replacement tires,  
Saturn strongly recommends that you get tires  
with the same TPC spec rating. This way, your  
vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed  
to give the same performance and vehicle safety,  
during normal use, as the original tires.  
is time for new tires is  
to check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of  
tread remaining.  
GM’s exclusive TPC spec system considers over  
a dozen critical specifications that impact the  
overall performance of your vehicle, including  
brake system performance, ride and handling,  
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring  
performance. GM’s TPC spec number is molded  
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.  
If the tires have an all-season tread design,  
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,  
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling  
on page 287 for additional information.  
You need a new tire if any of the following  
statements are true:  
You can see the indicators at three or more  
places around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through  
the tire’s rubber.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or  
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage  
that cannot be repaired well because of the  
size or location of the damage.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose  
control while driving. If you mix tires of  
different sizes, brands, or types (radial  
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may  
not handle properly, and you could have  
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,  
brands, or types may also cause damage  
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct  
size, brand, and type of tires on your  
vehicle’s wheels.  
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,  
the wheel rim flanges could develop  
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire  
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing  
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the  
wheels on your vehicle.  
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with  
those that do not have a TPC spec number,  
make sure they are the same size, load range,  
speed rating, and construction type (radial  
and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s  
original tires.  
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed  
on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center  
pillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on  
page 225, for more information about the Tire  
and Loading Information label.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
{CAUTION:  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different  
size than your original equipment wheels and  
tires, this may affect the way your vehicle  
performs, including its braking, ride and handling  
characteristics, stability, and resistance to  
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic  
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction  
control, and stability control, the performance  
of these systems can be affected.  
If you add different sized wheels, your  
vehicle may not provide an acceptable  
level of performance and safety if tires  
not recommended for those wheels are  
selected. You may increase the chance  
that you will crash and suffer serious  
injury. Only use Saturn specific wheel and  
tire systems developed for your vehicle,  
and have them properly installed by a  
Saturn certified technician.  
See Buying New Tires on page 296 and  
additional information.  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Treadwear  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire  
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times  
as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires  
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,  
however, and may depart significantly from  
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service  
practices, and differences in road characteristics  
and climate.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable  
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder  
and maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
The following information relates to the system  
developed by the United States National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which  
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and  
temperature performance. This applies only to  
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are  
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use  
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of  
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some  
limited-production tires.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,  
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with  
respect to these grades, they must also conform  
to federal safety requirements and additional  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)  
standards.  
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this  
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction  
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,  
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Temperature – A, B, C  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
The temperature grades are A (the highest),  
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The  
grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the  
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.  
Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than  
the minimum required by law.  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned  
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you  
the longest tire life and best overall performance.  
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire  
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.  
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your  
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the  
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice  
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth  
road, your tires and wheels may need to be  
rebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or  
badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep  
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel  
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks  
air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels,  
which can sometimes be repaired). See your  
retailer if any of these conditions exist.  
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire  
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and  
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,  
or excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible  
tire failure.  
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Each new wheel should have the same  
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and  
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause  
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,  
speedometer or odometer calibration,  
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground  
clearance, and tire clearance to the body  
and chassis.  
{CAUTION:  
Using the wrong replacement wheels,  
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle  
can be dangerous. It could affect the  
braking and handling of your vehicle,  
make your tires lose air and make you  
lose control. You could have a collision  
in which you or others could be injured.  
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,  
and wheel nuts for replacement.  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel  
could come off and cause a crash. When  
you change a wheel, remove any rust or  
dirt from places where the wheel attaches  
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can  
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;  
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush  
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or  
dirt off.  
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel  
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with  
new Saturn original equipment parts. This way,  
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel  
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can  
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.  
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly  
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence  
and to the proper torque specification.  
{CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on studs or the  
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the  
wheel nuts might come loose and the  
wheel could fall off, causing a crash.  
Used Replacement Wheels  
{CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  
dangerous. You cannot know how it has  
been used or how far it has been driven.  
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.  
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new  
Saturn original equipment wheel.  
{CAUTION:  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel  
to become loose and even come off.  
This could lead to a crash. Be sure to  
use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to  
replace them, be sure to get new Saturn  
original equipment wheel nuts.  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Chains  
If a Tire Goes Flat  
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no  
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and  
no place to store a tire.  
{CAUTION:  
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are  
driving, especially if you maintain your tires  
properly. See Tires on page 284. If air goes out  
of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.  
But, if you should ever have a blow out, here are  
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:  
Do not use tire chains. There is not  
enough clearance. Tire chains used on  
a vehicle without the proper amount of  
clearance can cause damage to the  
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle  
parts. The area damaged by the tire  
chains could cause you to lose control of  
your vehicle and you or others may be  
injured in a crash. Use another type of  
traction device only if its manufacturer  
recommends it for use on your vehicle  
and tire size combination and road  
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s  
instructions. To help avoid damage to  
your vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or  
remove the device if it is contacting your  
vehicle, and do not spin your wheels.  
If you do find traction devices that will fit,  
install them on the rear tires.  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag  
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take  
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the  
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane  
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out  
of the traffic lane.  
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much  
like a skid and may require the same correction  
you would use in a skid. In any rear blow out,  
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Get the vehicle under control by steering the way  
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very  
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently  
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
If the tire has been separated from the wheel  
or has damaged sidewalls or large tears that  
allow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility. See  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel  
damage by driving slowly to a level place  
and stopping. Then do this:  
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a  
nail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator  
kit may be used to repair the damaged tire  
temporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant to  
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.  
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See  
After repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,  
take your vehicle to an authorized Saturn retailer  
to have the tire inspected and repaired as  
soon as possible. The tire sealant is a temporary  
repair only. See Tire Inflator Kit on page 304.  
2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an  
automatic transmission, set the parking  
brake firmly and put the shift lever in  
If your vehicle has a manual transmission,  
move the shift lever to REVERSE (R) and  
set the parking brake firmly. See Parking  
page 89 for additional information.  
Tire Inflator Kit  
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jack  
or spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant  
and air at the same time to seal small punctures  
in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read  
and follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.  
The kit includes the following:  
3. Turn off the engine.  
4. Inspect the flat tire.  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail  
or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may  
be used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.  
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire  
inflator kit, it is recommended to take your  
vehicle to an authorized Saturn retailer within  
100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving to have the  
tire inspected and repaired. If the sealant is  
not removed from the tire within 100 miles  
(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likely that the  
tire may get damaged and have to be replaced.  
A. Air Compressor  
E. Air Pressure Gage  
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor  
C. Air Compressor  
Accessory Plug  
D. On/Off Switch  
Inflator Hose  
G. Sealant  
Filling Hose  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Remove the tire  
inflator kit strap  
by squeezing  
the two tabs of  
the quick release  
buckle.  
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit  
To access the tire inflator kit, do the following:  
1. Make sure the convertible top is in the up  
position before accessing the tire inflator kit.  
2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68 for  
more information.  
5. Remove the inflator kit from its foam container.  
3. Locate the tire inflator kit on the driver’s  
side of the vehicle, near the back corner of  
the trunk.  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Sealant  
Using the Tire Inflator Kit  
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected  
into a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes  
or cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant  
cannot repair tire damage caused while driving  
on a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” or  
a tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.  
The tire sealant solution is to be used for a single  
tire and can only be used once.  
To use the tire inflator kit, do the following:  
1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrap  
the sealant filling hose from the compressor.  
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug  
from the unit. To do this, pull the top portion  
of the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,  
and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert the  
plug into an accessory outlet yet.  
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the  
sealant canister. The sealant may not be  
as effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,  
see your retailer for a replacement canister.  
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the  
tire, do not remove it.  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or  
with the climate control system off can  
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).  
See Engine Exhaust on page 91.  
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine  
on page 80 for more information. The  
vehicle must be running while using the  
air compressor.  
{CAUTION:  
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire  
valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.  
Inflating something too much can make  
it explode, and you or others could be  
injured. Be sure to read the inflator  
instructions, and inflate the tire to its  
recommended pressure. Do not exceed  
36 psi (248 kPa).  
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is  
in the O (off) position.  
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)  
into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.  
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121  
for more information.  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on)  
position.  
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot  
be reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle  
should not be driven farther. Damage to the  
tire is severe and the sealant will not be  
effective. Remove the air compressor plug  
from the accessory power outlet and unscrew  
the inflating hose from the tire valve. See  
The inflator kit will force sealant and air into  
the tire. Sealant may leak from the puncture  
hole until the vehicle is driven and the hole  
has sealed.  
8. Make sure there is a proper connection  
between the tire valve stem and the  
sealant filling hose by looking at the air  
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure  
reading while the compressor is running,  
the connection between the inflator kit and  
the tire is bad.  
10. Push the inflator kit switch to the O (off)  
position once the correct tire pressure is  
obtained.  
11. Turn off the engine.  
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug  
from the accessory power outlet in the  
vehicle.  
Check the attachment between the sealant  
filling hose and the tire valve stem.  
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended  
inflation pressure, found on the Tire and  
Loading Information label located on  
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below the  
vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure  
gage on the top of the unit.  
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the  
tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,  
and replace the tire valve stem cap.  
Be careful when handling the tire inflator  
components as they may be hot after usage.  
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air  
compressor channel to stow it in its original  
location.  
The pressure gage reading is slightly high  
while the compressor is on. Turn the  
compressor off to get an accurate pressure  
reading.  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back  
in the air compressor. To do this, wrap the  
air compressor accessory plug, snap in  
the plug, and then push in the bottom and  
then the top of the wrapped air compressor  
accessory plug.  
{CAUTION:  
Storing the tire inflator kit or other  
equipment in the passenger compartment  
of the vehicle could cause injury.  
In a sudden stop or collision, loose  
equipment could strike someone. Store  
the tire inflator kit in the proper place.  
16. If the flat tire was  
able to inflate to  
the recommended  
inflation pressure,  
remove the  
maximum speed  
label from the  
sealant canister.  
17. Return the equipment to the proper storage  
location in the trunk of your vehicle. You may  
need to loosen the retention strap to wrap  
it around the inflator kit and foam container.  
To do this, pull apart the strap and loosen  
the strap at the quick release buckle.  
Then snap the buckle together, pull the strap  
tight, and secure the loose end of the strap  
by mating the ends.  
Place it in a highly visible location such as  
the inside of the upper left corner of the  
windshield or to the face of the radio/clock.  
The maximum speed label reminds you  
to drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph  
(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tire  
inspected and repaired.  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)  
to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.  
Stop at a safe location and check the  
tire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under  
“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”  
next in this section. If the tire pressure  
has fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), below  
the recommended inflation pressure, stop  
driving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for  
the sealant to work. See Roadside Assistance  
Program on page 359.  
Using the Air Compressor without  
Sealant  
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,  
do the following:  
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug  
from the air compressor.  
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than  
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended  
inflation pressure, you can inflate the tire back  
up to the recommended inflation pressure.  
19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local  
retailer or in accordance with your local  
state codes and practices.  
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the  
sealant canister by pulling up on the lever.  
After using the sealant canister, replace it  
with a new canister from a retailer.  
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from  
the sealant canister.  
20. After temporarily repairing a tire with the  
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your  
vehicle to an authorized retailer to have  
the tire inspected and repaired.  
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto  
the tire valve stem and push the lever down  
to secure in place.  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into  
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See  
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121 for  
more information.  
{CAUTION:  
Inflating something too much can make  
it explode, and you or others could be  
injured. Be sure to read the inflator  
instructions, and inflate the tire to its  
recommended pressure. Do not exceed  
36 psi (248 kPa).  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or  
with the climate control system off can  
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).  
See Engine Exhaust on page 91.  
7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.  
8. Make sure there is a proper connection  
between the tire valve stem and the air  
compressor hose by looking at the air  
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure  
reading while the compressor is running, the  
connection between the inflator kit and  
the tire is bad.  
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine  
on page 80 for more information. The  
vehicle must be running while using the  
air compressor.  
Check the attachment between the air  
compressor hose and the tire valve stem.  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended  
inflation pressure using the air pressure gage  
on the top of the unit.  
Removal and Installation of the  
Sealant Canister  
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:  
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the  
switch to the O (off) position.  
{CAUTION:  
Storing the tire inflator kit or other  
equipment in the passenger compartment  
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a  
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment  
could strike someone. Store the tire  
inflator kit in the proper place.  
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from  
the sealant canister by pulling the lever up.  
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose  
from the sealant canister.  
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and  
wrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.  
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the  
compressor.  
12. Place the equipment in the original location in  
the trunk of your vehicle.  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To install a new sealant canister, do the following:  
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot  
in the air compressor.  
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn  
it clockwise.  
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the  
air compressor channel to stow it in its  
original location.  
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto  
the sealant canister inlet and push the  
lever down.  
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling  
hose is aligned with the slot in the  
compressor.  
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor  
and replace with a new sealant canister.  
See your retailer for more information.  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remove any accidental over-spray from other  
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
Appearance Care  
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle  
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when  
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you  
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage  
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning  
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth  
and glass cleaner.  
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its  
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always  
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your  
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,  
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is  
recommended to remove particles from your  
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery  
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.  
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.  
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes  
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.  
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to  
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning  
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate  
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and  
windows.  
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent  
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and  
garments that transfer color to your home  
furnishings may also transfer color to your  
vehicle’s interior.  
Dust may be removed from small buttons and  
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.  
Your retailer has a product for cleaning your  
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you  
can also obtain a product from your retailer to  
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.  
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use  
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces  
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from  
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were  
not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not clean your vehicle using the following  
cleaners or techniques:  
Fabric/Carpet  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush  
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to  
remove a soil from any interior surface.  
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose  
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in  
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and  
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove  
them first with plain water or club soda. Before  
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil  
as possible using one of the following techniques:  
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage  
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.  
Never apply heavy pressure or rub  
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of  
heavy pressure can damage your interior and  
does not improve the effectiveness of soil  
removal.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a  
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the  
paper towel until no more can be removed.  
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid  
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with  
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave  
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.  
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per  
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible  
and then vacuum.  
To clean, use the following instructions:  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with  
water or club soda.  
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while  
cleaning.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently  
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,  
using a clean area of the cloth each time it  
becomes soiled.  
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result  
from the use of many organic solvents such  
as naptha, alcohol, etc.  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
preserve and protect leather may permanently  
change the appearance and feel of your leather  
and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or  
wax-based products, or those containing organic  
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing  
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use  
shoe polish on your leather.  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a  
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning  
process that was used with plain water.  
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric  
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a  
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be  
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness  
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any  
impression that a ring formation may result, clean  
the entire surface.  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and  
Other Plastic Surfaces  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is  
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a  
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove  
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers  
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and  
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect  
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the  
appearance and feel of your interior and are  
not recommended. Do not use silicone or  
wax-based products, or those containing organic  
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing  
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.  
After the cleaning process has been completed,  
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture  
from the fabric or carpet.  
Leather  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used  
to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning  
is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild  
soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry  
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use  
steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or  
spot removers on leather. Many commercial  
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some commercial products may increase gloss on  
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss  
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield  
and even make it difficult to see through the  
windshield under certain conditions.  
Washing Your Vehicle  
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,  
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.  
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is  
to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm  
or cold water.  
Care of Safety Belts  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the  
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong  
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the  
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.  
You can get approved cleaning products from your  
on page 323. Do not use cleaning agents that are  
petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.  
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and  
not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could  
stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or  
an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and  
water spotting.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you  
do, it may severely weaken them. In a  
crash, they might not be able to provide  
adequate protection. Clean safety belts  
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.  
Weatherstrips  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them  
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.  
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During  
very cold, damp weather frequent application may  
be required. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 345.  
High pressure car washes may cause water to  
enter your vehicle.  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and  
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,  
tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial  
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if  
they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle  
as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive  
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces  
to remove foreign matter.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and  
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps  
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing  
Your Vehicle on page 318.  
Finish Care  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,  
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their toll  
over a period of years. You can help to keep the  
paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle in  
a garage or covered whenever possible.  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your  
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove  
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved  
cleaning products from your Saturn retailer. See  
Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint  
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss  
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes  
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for  
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
If the windshield is not clear after using the  
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters  
when running, wax, sap, or other material may  
be on the blade or windshield.  
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint  
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive  
waxes and polishes that are made for a  
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass  
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.  
The windshield is clean if beads do not form  
when it is rinsed with water.  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper  
blades and affect their performance. Clean  
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked  
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then  
rinse the blade with water.  
To protect the convertible top:  
After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top  
is completely dry before you lower it.  
Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s  
painted finish; it could leave streaks.  
Check the wiper blades and clean them as  
necessary; replace blades that look worn.  
If you decide to go through an automatic car  
wash, ask the manager if the equipment  
could damage your top.  
Convertible Top  
The vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned  
often. However, high pressure car washes  
may cause water to enter your vehicle.  
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels  
Your vehicle may be equipped with either  
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.  
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial  
shade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a  
soft sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint on  
the top, and a brush can chafe the threads in  
the top fabric. Do not use detergents, harsh  
cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth  
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.  
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean  
towel. A wax may then be applied.  
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,  
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or  
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the  
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Use only  
Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels.  
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly  
to avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the  
fabric for a few minutes. When the top is really  
dirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly  
rinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dry  
in direct sunlight.  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The surface of these wheels is similar to the  
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong  
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive  
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning  
brushes on them because you could damage  
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on  
aluminum wheels.  
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic  
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning  
brushes. These brushes can also damage  
the surface of these wheels.  
Tires  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire  
cleaner.  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum  
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on your vehicle may damage the  
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire  
dressing, always wipe off any overspray  
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.  
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,  
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and  
buff off immediately after application.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an  
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide  
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage  
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with  
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through  
an automatic car wash that uses silicone  
carbide tire cleaning brushes.  
Sheet Metal Damage  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet  
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body  
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to  
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion  
protection.  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will  
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining  
the warranty.  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At least every spring, flush these materials from  
the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas  
where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in  
close areas of the frame should be loosened before  
being flushed. Your Saturn retailer or an underbody  
car washing system can do this for you.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches  
in the finish should be repaired right away.  
Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop  
into major repair expense.  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired  
with touch-up materials available from your  
Saturn retailer. Larger areas of finish damage  
can be corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body  
and paint shop.  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can  
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can  
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your  
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,  
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular  
dark spots etched into the paint surface.  
Underbody Maintenance  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and  
dust control can collect on the underbody.  
If these are not removed, corrosion and rust  
can develop on the underbody parts such as  
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system  
even though they have corrosion protection.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,  
Saturn will repair, at no charge to the owner,  
the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by  
this fallout condition within 12 months or  
12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,  
whichever occurs first.  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials  
Description  
Usage  
Removes swirl marks, fine  
scratches and other light  
surface contamination.  
Description  
Usage  
Swirl Remover Polish  
Polishing Cloth  
Wax-Treated  
Interior and exterior  
polishing cloth.  
Removes light scratches  
and protects finish.  
Cleaner Wax  
Tar and Road  
Oil Remover  
Removes tar, road oil  
and asphalt.  
Cleans, shines and  
protects in one easy step,  
no wiping necessary.  
Foaming Tire Shine  
Low Gloss  
Chrome Cleaner  
and Polish  
Use on chrome or  
stainless steel.  
Medium foaming  
shampoo. Cleans  
and lightly waxes.  
Biodegradable and  
phosphate free.  
Vinyl Cleaner  
Cleans vinyl.  
Wash Wax Concentrate  
Convertible Top Cleaner  
Cleans convertible tops.  
Convertible Top Protector Protects convertible tops.  
Removes dirt, grime,  
Glass Cleaner  
Quickly and easily  
smoke and fingerprints.  
removes spots and stains  
from carpets, vinyl and  
cloth upholstery.  
Spot Lifter  
Removes dirt and grime  
Chrome and Wire  
from chrome wheels and  
Wheel Cleaner  
wire wheel covers.  
Odorless spray odor  
eliminator used on fabrics,  
vinyl, leather and carpet.  
Odor Eliminator  
Removes dust,  
fingerprints, and surface  
Finish Enhancer  
contaminants. Spray  
on wipe off.  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Identification  
Vehicle Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine  
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s  
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
You will find this label on the inside of the glove  
box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order  
parts. On this label, you will find the following:  
VIN  
Model designation  
Paint information  
Production options and special equipment  
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.  
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It  
appears on a plate in the front corner of the  
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see  
it if you look through the windshield from outside  
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle  
Certification and Service Parts labels and the  
certificates of title and registration.  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Windows and Other  
Power Options  
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and  
other power accessories. When the current load is  
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,  
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed  
or goes away.  
Electrical System  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your  
vehicle unless you check with your retailer  
first. Some electrical equipment can damage  
your vehicle and the damage would not  
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on  
electrical equipment can keep other  
Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
components from working as they should.  
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,  
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces  
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.  
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before  
attempting to add anything electrical to your  
Vehicle on page 54.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.  
If the band is broken or melted, replace the  
fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new  
one of the identical size and rating.  
Headlamp Wiring  
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses.  
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to  
remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp  
wiring checked right away.  
If you ever have a problem on the road and do  
not have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has  
the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your  
vehicle that you can get along without – like the  
radio or cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the  
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Floor Console Fuse Block  
The floor console fuse block is located on the  
passenger’s side of the vehicle under the carpet.  
Remove the fuse block cover to access the  
fuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.  
After re-installing the fuse block cover, be sure to  
tuck the carpet under the heater floor outlets.  
Fuses  
Usage  
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Puller  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
6
7
8
9
Amplifier  
Cluster  
Electric Power Steering,  
Steering Wheel Controls  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Spare  
Ignition Switch, PassKey III+  
Stoplamp  
Spare  
Empty  
Climate Control System,  
PassKey III+  
10  
Radio  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Empty  
Spare  
Airbag  
Spare  
Wiper  
Sensing and Diagnostic Module  
Engine Control Module,  
Transmission Control Module  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
Door Locks  
Interior Lamps  
Steering Wheel Control Backlighting  
Power Windows  
Climate Control System,  
Automatic Occupant Sensing  
Module, Clutch Switch, Crank  
Relay, Instrument Panel Cluster  
16  
Climate Control System  
Empty  
17  
18  
Empty  
Empty  
Retained Accessory Power  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Underhood Fuse Block  
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine  
compartment on the passenger’s side of the  
vehicle.  
Lift the cover for access to the fuse block.  
To remove fuses, use the fuse puller, or hold the  
end of the fuse between your thumb and index  
finger and pull straight out.  
for more information on location.  
Fuses  
Usage  
Empty (LE5); Cooling Fan (LNF)  
Rear Window Defogger  
Empty  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Body Control Module 3  
Crank  
Body Control Module 2  
Body Control Module  
Cooling Fan 2 (LE5); Empty (LNF)  
Empty  
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
10  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
Trunk  
Back-up Lamps Relay  
(Automatic Transmission);  
Empty (Manual Transmission)  
28  
11  
Trunk  
12  
Empty  
29  
30  
Data Link Connector  
Outlet  
13  
Fuel Pump  
14  
Rear Defogger Relay  
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay  
Empty  
Back-up Lamps  
31  
(Automatic Transmission);  
Empty (Manual Transmission)  
15  
16  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Empty (LE5); Vacuum Pump (LNF)  
17  
Empty  
Emissions  
Crank Relay  
Empty  
18  
Trunk Release Relay  
Fuel Pump Relay  
Empty  
19  
20  
Empty  
21  
Mirrors  
Power Seat  
22  
Air Conditioning  
Empty  
Empty (LE5); Vacuum Pump  
Relay (LNF)  
38  
23  
Cooling Fan 2 Relay (LE5);  
Empty (LNF)  
39  
40  
Empty  
24  
Cooling Fan 1 (LE5); Empty (LNF)  
25  
26  
27  
Fuse Puller  
Powertrain Relay  
Empty  
Empty (LE5); Turbo, Cam  
Phaser (LNF)  
41  
42  
Engine Control Module  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
43  
Usage  
Fuses  
57  
Usage  
Anti-lock Brake System  
Wiper Diode  
Engine Control Module,  
Transmission  
58  
44  
Anti-lock Brake System  
59  
Windshield Wiper  
Injectors, Ignition Coils (LE5);  
Ignition Coils (LNF)  
45  
60  
Horn  
61  
Anti-lock Brake System  
Instrument Panel Ignition  
Driver’s Side High Beam  
Canister Vent  
Back-up Lamps  
46  
(Manual Transmission);  
Empty (Automatic Transmission)  
62  
63  
47  
48  
49  
Empty  
64  
Daytime Running Lamps Relay  
Daytime Running Lamps  
65  
Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp  
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam  
Headlamp  
66  
67  
Cooling Fan 1 Relay (LE5);  
Empty (LNF)  
50  
Passenger’s Side High-Beam  
Headlamp  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
Run/Crank Relay  
Windshield Wiper Low/High Relay  
Fog Lamps  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
Parking Lamps Relay  
Parking Lamps  
Fog Lamps Relay  
Horn Relay  
S Band, OnStar®, Remote  
Keyless Entry System  
Windshield Wiper On/Off Relay  
Low-Beam Headlamp Relay  
High-Beam Headlamp Relay  
56  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 345 for more information.  
Capacities  
Application  
English  
Metric  
For the air conditioning system refrigerant  
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution  
label located under the hood.  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a  
See your retailer for more information.  
Cooling System  
2.0L L4 Engine Automatic  
2.0L L4 Engine Manual  
2.4L L4 Engine Automatic  
2.4L L4 Engine Manual  
Engine Oil with Filter  
2.0L L4 and 2.4L L4  
Fuel Tank  
8.9 qt  
9.0 qt  
8.5 qt  
8.7 qt  
8.4 L  
8.6 L  
8.0 L  
8.2 L  
5.0 qt  
4.7 L  
13.6 gal  
51.5 L  
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Capacities  
Application  
English  
9.0 qt  
Metric  
8.5 L  
Transmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)  
Transmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)  
Wheel Nut Torque  
2.75 qt  
100 lb ft  
2.6 L  
140 Y  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.  
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
VIN Code  
Transmission  
Spark Plug Gap  
Automatic  
Manual  
2.0L L4  
X
0.035 inch (0.9mm)  
Automatic  
Manual  
2.4L L4  
B
0.040 inch (1.01 mm)  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
Maintenance Schedule  
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle  
in good working condition. But we do not know  
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very  
short distances only a few times a week. Or you  
may drive long distances all the time in very hot,  
dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making  
deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do  
errands, or in many other ways.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level  
and change as recommended.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,  
inspections, replacement parts, and  
recommended fluids and lubricants as  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need  
more frequent checks and replacements. So please  
read the following and note how you drive. If you  
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in  
good condition, see your Saturn retailer.  
prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep  
your vehicle in good working condition. Any  
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled  
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep  
your vehicle in good working condition, but also  
helps the environment. All recommended  
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle  
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air  
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong  
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions  
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,  
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be  
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.  
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
carry passengers and cargo within  
recommended limits. You will find these limits  
on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 225.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within  
legal driving limits.  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline  
Octane on page 235.  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on  
page 336 should be performed when indicated.  
and Maintenance Footnotes on page 339 for  
further information.  
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your  
service needs, you will know that Saturn-trained  
and supported service technicians will perform the  
work using genuine Saturn parts.  
If you want to purchase service information, see  
page 369.  
{CAUTION:  
Owner Checks and Services on page 340 tells you  
what should be checked, when to check it, and  
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in  
good condition.  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle  
can be dangerous. In trying to do some  
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your  
own maintenance work only if you have the  
required know-how and the proper tools  
and equipment for the job. If you have any  
doubt, see your retailer to have a qualified  
technician do the work. See Doing Your  
Own Service Work on page 234.  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and  
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended  
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these  
are used. All parts should be replaced and all  
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else  
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of  
genuine Saturn parts.  
Some maintenance services can be complex.  
So, unless you are technically qualified and  
have the necessary equipment, you should  
have your Saturn retailer do these jobs.  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,  
certain services, checks, and inspections are  
required. Required services are described in the  
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”  
Generally, it is recommended that your first  
service be Maintenance I, your second service  
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate  
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.  
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may  
be required more often.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message on the  
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it  
means that service is required for your vehicle.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 147.  
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible  
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible  
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,  
the engine oil life system may not indicate  
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.  
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed  
at least once a year and at this time the system  
must be reset. Your Saturn retailer has  
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the  
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within  
10 months since the vehicle was purchased  
or Maintenance II was performed.  
Saturn-trained service technicians who will  
perform this work using genuine Saturn parts  
and reset the system.  
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the  
previous service performed was Maintenance I.  
Always use Maintenance II whenever the  
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on  
10 months or more since the last service or if the  
message has not come on at all for one year.  
If the engine oil life system is ever reset  
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within  
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.  
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System  
on page 250 for information on the Engine Oil Life  
System and resetting the system.  
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scheduled Maintenance  
Service  
Maintenance I Maintenance II  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 245. Reset oil life system.  
See Engine Oil Life System on page 250. An Emission Control Service.  
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 252. See footnote (h).  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and  
Rotation on page 294 and At Least Once a Month on page 341.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. Add fluid as needed.  
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”  
in this section.  
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated  
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See  
Change automatic transmission fluid  
(severe service). See footnote (k).  
Change automatic transmission fluid  
(normal service).  
Replace spark plugs. An Emission  
Control Service.  
Engine cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (i).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (g).  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all  
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and  
anchorages are working properly. Look for  
any other loose or damaged safety belt system  
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety  
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.  
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also  
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,  
and have them repaired or replaced. The  
Maintenance Footnotes  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for  
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,  
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors  
for surface condition. Inspect drum brake  
linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect other  
brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,  
calipers, parking brake, etc.  
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing  
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines  
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,  
cracks, chafing, etc.  
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all  
hinges and latches, including those for the  
body doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring  
anchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glove  
box door, and console door. More frequent  
lubrication may be required when exposed to a  
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on  
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them  
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.  
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced  
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.  
Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with  
genuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure  
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling  
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside  
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is  
recommended at least once a year.  
(g) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive  
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if  
necessary.  
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or  
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn  
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of  
the windshield.  
(h) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,  
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This  
service can be complex; you should have  
your retailer perform this service. See Engine  
Coolant on page 255 for what to use. Inspect  
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,  
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling  
system and pressure cap.  
Owner Checks and Services  
These owner checks and services should be  
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure  
the safety, dependability, and emission control  
performance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailer  
can assist you with these checks and services.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at  
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added  
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper  
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 345.  
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate  
a problem. Have the system inspected and  
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid  
if needed.  
(k) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter  
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  
more of these conditions:  
In heavy city traffic where the outside  
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)  
or higher.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
Uses such as found in taxi, police, or  
delivery service.  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
At Each Fuel Fill  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in  
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add  
the proper fluid if necessary.  
It is important to perform these underhood checks  
at each fuel fill.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
At Least Once a Month  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil  
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 245 for  
further details.  
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check  
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear  
and make sure they are inflated to the correct  
on page 292.  
Notice: It is important to check your oil  
regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper  
level can cause damage to your engine  
not covered by your warranty.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Check the engine coolant level and add  
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See  
Engine Coolant on page 255 for further details.  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. On automatic transmission vehicles,  
try to start the engine in each gear. The  
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or  
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in  
any other position, contact your Saturn  
retailer for service.  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
{CAUTION:  
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift  
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal  
down halfway, and try to start the engine.  
The vehicle should start only when the clutch  
pedal is pushed down all the way to the  
floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal  
is not pushed all the way down, contact your  
Saturn retailer for service.  
When you are doing this inspection, the  
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle  
moves, you or others could be injured.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough  
room around the vehicle.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the  
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 86.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be  
ready to turn off the engine immediately if  
it starts.  
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  
Control System Check  
Ignition Transmission Lock Check  
While parked, and with the parking brake set,  
try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever  
position.  
{CAUTION:  
With an automatic transmission, the ignition  
should turn to LOCK only when the shift  
lever is in PARK (P). The ignition key should  
come out only in LOCK.  
When you are doing this inspection, the  
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle  
moves, you or others could be injured.  
With a manual transmission, the ignition key  
should come out only in LOCK.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked  
on a level surface.  
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.  
It should only lock when turned to the right.  
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking  
Brake on page 86.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake  
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.  
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,  
but do not start the engine. Without applying  
the regular brake, try to move the shift  
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort.  
If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P),  
contact your Saturn retailer for service.  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular  
brake, set the parking brake.  
Parking Brake and Automatic  
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism  
Check  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:  
With the engine running and transmission in  
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure  
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the  
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.  
{CAUTION:  
When you are doing this check, your  
vehicle could begin to move. You or  
others could be injured and property  
could be damaged. Make sure there is  
room in front of your vehicle in case it  
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the  
regular brake at once should the vehicle  
begin to move.  
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding  
ability: With the engine running, shift to  
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake  
followed by the regular brake.  
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.  
Underbody Flushing Service  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush  
any corrosive materials from the underbody.  
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where  
mud and other debris can collect.  
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
The engine requires a special  
engine oil meeting GM Standard  
GM4718M. Oils meeting this  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,  
part number, or specification may be obtained  
from your retailer.  
standard may be identified with the  
American Petroleum Institute (API)  
Certified for Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. However, not all  
synthetic API oils with the starburst  
symbol will meet this GM standard.  
You should look for and use only  
an oil that meets GM Standard  
GM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oil  
meets all the requirements for your  
vehicle. For the proper viscosity,  
see Engine Oil on page 245.  
Engine Oil  
(2.0L L4  
engine)  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Engine oil which meets GM  
Standard GM6094M and displays  
the American Petroleum Institute  
Certified for Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®  
oil meets all the requirements for  
your vehicle. To determine the  
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s  
engine, see Engine Oil on page 245.  
Engine Oil  
(2.4L L4  
engine)  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on  
page 255.  
Engine Coolant  
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or  
System  
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.  
Hydraulic  
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or  
Clutch System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.  
GM Power Steering Fluid  
Power Steering  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,  
System  
in Canada 89021186).  
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Chassis Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,  
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Windshield  
Washer  
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.  
Chassis  
Lubrication  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,  
in Canada 89021807).  
Manual  
Transmission  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Secondary  
Latch,  
Automatic  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
Transmission Transmission Fluid.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Pivots, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
Anchor, and  
Release Pawl  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic  
Axle Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,  
in Canada 89021678) meeting  
GM Specification 9986115.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Hood and Door  
Hinges  
Rear Axle  
Weatherstrip Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,  
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic  
Axle Lubricant  
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or  
Conditioning  
Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,  
in Canada 992887).  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,  
in Canada 89021678) meeting  
GM Specification 9986115. With  
a complete drain and refill add  
4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip  
Axle Lubricant Additive  
Rear Axle  
(Limited-Slip  
Differential)  
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,  
in Canada 992694) where required.  
See Rear Axle on page 278.  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from  
your retailer.  
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts  
ACDelco® Part  
Number  
Part  
Part Number  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
15287103  
12605566  
A3076C  
PF457G  
2.0L and 2.4L Engine Oil Filter  
Spark Plugs  
2.0L L4 Engine  
12590701  
12598004  
41-102  
41-103  
2.4L L4 Engine  
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)  
Driver’s Side — 16 inches (40 cm)  
Passenger’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm)  
10344209  
10344210  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Drive Belt Routing  
2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines  
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,  
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 334.  
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 340 can be added on the following  
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP TWO: Should you need additional  
assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn  
Customer Assistance Center by calling  
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre at  
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance  
Center team member will handle your call  
and assist in providing product and warranty  
information, the nearest retailer location, roadside  
assistance, brochures, literature and discuss  
any concerns you may have.  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important  
to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are  
committed to providing our customers with  
unparalleled service, before, during and after the  
purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer  
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.  
Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction  
or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved  
by your retailer’s sales or service departments.  
If, for any reason, your ownership experience  
falls below your expectations, we suggest you  
take the following action:  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number  
in order to give your inquiry prompt attention.  
Please have the following information available to  
give the Customer Assistance Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digit  
number can be found on the vehicle  
registration or title, on the upper driver’s side  
corner of the dash, or on your roadside  
assistance key card.  
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer  
Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail  
management team has the authority and the  
desire to resolve your concerns. Normally,  
concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.  
The name of your selling and servicing  
retail facility.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
Your daytime and evening phone numbers.  
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When contacting Saturn, please remember that  
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s  
facility. That is why we suggest you follow  
Step One first if you have a concern.  
Although you may be required to resort to this  
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing  
a court action, use of the program is free of charge  
and your case will generally be heard within  
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision  
given in your case, you may reject it and proceed  
with any other venue for relief available to you.  
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and  
its retailers are committed to making sure you  
are completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.  
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied  
after following the procedure outlined in  
Steps One and Two, Saturn and its retailers  
offer the additional assistance of a neutral  
party through our voluntary participation in a  
mediation/arbitration program called BBB  
Auto Line.  
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program  
by using the toll-free telephone number or  
by writing them at the following address:  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court  
program administered by the Council of Better  
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes  
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation  
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program  
is available at no cost to you, our customer.  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
This program is available in all 50 states and  
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited  
by vehicle age, mileage and other factors.  
Saturn Corporation reserves the right to change  
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its  
participation in this program.  
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):  
For further information concerning eligibility in  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan  
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.  
Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer  
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or  
you may write to:  
General Motors Participation in the  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
In the event that you do not feel your concerns  
have been addressed after following the procedure  
outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of  
Canada Limited has committed to binding  
arbitration of owner disputes involving  
factory-related vehicle service claims. The  
program provides for the review of the facts  
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and  
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.  
The program is designed so that the entire  
dispute settlement process, from the time you file  
your complaint to the final decision, should be  
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe  
our impartial program offers advantages over  
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,  
quick, and free of charge.  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
c/o Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Mail Code: CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).  
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
My GM Canada (Canada only)  
Online Owner Center  
My GM Canada is a password-protected section  
of gmcanada.com where you can save information  
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and  
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.  
Online Owner Center  
(United States only)  
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn  
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can  
be found in one place.  
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services  
you will have access to:  
The Online Owner Center allows you to:  
− My Showroom: Find and save information on  
vehicles and current offers in your area.  
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as  
address and phone number for each of  
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.  
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and  
helpful advice on owning and maintaining  
your vehicle.  
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,  
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms  
with greater ease.  
Get e-mail service reminders.  
Access information about your specific  
vehicle, including tips and videos and  
an electronic version of this owner manual.  
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history  
and maintenance schedule.  
Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.  
Receive special promotions and privileges only  
available to members.  
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated  
information and to register your vehicle.  
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM  
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.  
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
Customer Assistance Offices  
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write  
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:  
To assist owners who have hearing  
difficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD  
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)  
equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance  
Center.  
Saturn Customer Assistance Center  
100 Saturn Parkway  
Mail Code 371-999-S24  
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500  
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer  
who has access to a TDD or to a conventional  
Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with  
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users  
in Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.  
1-800-553-6000  
1-800-833-6000  
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000  
In Canada, write to:  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Ltd.  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
www.gmcanada.com  
1-800-263-1999  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone  
devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800  
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Canada, customers may call the  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in  
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.  
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
Roadside Assistance Program  
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call  
1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).  
For vehicles purchased in Canada call  
1-800-268-6800.  
This program, available to qualified applicants,  
can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible  
aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive  
equipment you may require for your vehicle such  
as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.  
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year  
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle,  
you are automatically enrolled in the Saturn  
Roadside Assistance Program. This value-added  
service is intended to provide you with peace  
of mind as you drive in the city or travel the  
open road.  
The offer is available for a limited period of time  
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.  
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s  
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the  
Saturn Customer Assistance Center at  
1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-6000.  
Who is Covered?  
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle  
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving  
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is  
not eligible for coverage.  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following services are provided in the U.S.  
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and  
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage  
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to  
a maximum coverage of $100.  
Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway  
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn  
retailer for warranty service or in the event  
of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out  
assistance provided when the vehicle is mired  
in sand, mud, or snow.  
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the  
customer to get to the nearest service station  
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres  
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may  
be restricted. For safety reasons, propane  
and other alternative fuels will not be provided  
through this service.  
Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare  
time, installation of that tire, in good condition,  
will be covered at no charge. The customer  
is responsible for the repair or replacement  
of the tire if not covered by a warrantable  
failure.  
Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the  
driver must present the vehicle registration  
and personal ID before lock-out service  
is provided. Lock-out service will be covered  
at no charge if you are unable to gain  
entry into your vehicle. If you vehicle will not  
start, Roadside Assistance will arrange to have  
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized  
retailer. In the U.S., replacement keys made  
at the customer’s expense will be delivered  
within 10 miles.  
Jump Start: No-start occurrences which  
require a battery jump start will be covered  
at no charge.  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
and (C) alternate ground transportation  
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist  
you with some of the unplanned expense you  
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be  
repaired.  
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and  
a copy of the repair order are required.  
Additional Services for Canadian  
Customers  
Trip Routing Service: Upon request,  
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,  
computer personalized maps, highlighting your  
choice of either the most direct route or the  
most scenic route to your destination,  
anywhere in North America, along with any  
helpful travel information we may have  
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,  
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.  
Once authorization has been given, your  
advisor will help you make any necessary  
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip  
interruption expense assistance.  
We will make every attempt to send your  
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,  
but it is best to allow three weeks before your  
planned departure date. Trip routing requests  
will be limited to six per calendar year.  
Alternative Service: There may be times when  
Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely  
assistance, your advisor may authorize you to  
secure local emergency road service, and you  
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission  
of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:  
In the event of a warranty related vehicle  
disablement, while en route and over  
In many instances, mechanical failures are  
covered under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper  
warranty for U.S. customers, and the duration  
of the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadian  
customers of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
However, any cost for parts and labor for  
non-warranty repairs are the responsibility of  
the driver.  
250 kilometres from original point of departure,  
you may qualify for trip interruption expense  
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable  
reimbursement of up to a maximum of  
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of  
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,  
please provide the following to the Roadside  
Assistance Representatives:  
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited  
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement  
to an owner or driver when, in their sole  
discretion, the claims become excessive in  
frequency or type of occurrence.  
Your name, home address, and home  
telephone number  
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in  
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of Canada  
Limited reserve the right to make any changes  
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program  
at any time without notification.  
Telephone number of your location  
Location of the vehicle  
Model, year, color, and license plate number  
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification  
Number and delivery date of the vehicle  
Towing and Road Service Exclusions  
Description of the problem  
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance  
coverage are towing or services for vehicles  
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,  
fines, impound towing caused by a violation  
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal  
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing  
of snow tires, chains or other traction devices.  
While we hope you never have the occasion to  
use our service, it is added security while traveling  
for you and your family. Remember we are only  
a phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:  
1-800-553-6000; text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customers  
call 1-800-268-6800.  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,  
and the severity of a collision. This information  
has been used to improve vehicle crash  
performance and may be used to improve  
crash performance of future vehicles and driving  
safety. Unlike the data recorders on many  
airplanes, these on-board systems do not  
record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle  
occupants.  
Vehicle Data Collection and  
Event Data Recorders  
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,  
has a number of sophisticated computer systems  
that monitor and control several aspects of the  
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses  
on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission  
control components to optimize fuel economy,  
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment  
and, if the vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake  
System (ABS), to provide anti-lock braking and  
to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult  
driving situations. Some information may be stored  
during regular operations to facilitate repair of  
detected malfunctions; other information is stored  
only in a crash event by computer systems,  
such as those commonly called Event Data  
Recorders (EDR).  
To read this information, special equipment is  
needed and access to the vehicle or the device  
that stores the data is required. GM will not access  
information about a crash event or share it with  
others other than:  
with the consent of the vehicle owner or,  
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of  
the lessee,  
in response to an official request of police  
or similar government office,  
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the  
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)  
in your vehicle may record information about the  
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,  
such as data related to engine speed, brake  
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety  
as part of GM’s defense of litigation through  
the discovery process, or  
as required by law.  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,  
GM may:  
Collision Damage Repair  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is  
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified  
technician using the proper equipment and  
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed  
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale  
value, and safety performance can be  
use the data for GM research needs,  
make it available for research where  
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained  
and need is shown, or  
share summary data which is not tied to a  
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations  
for research purposes.  
compromised in subsequent collisions.  
Collision Parts  
Others, such as law enforcement, may have  
access to the special equipment that can read  
the information if they have access to the vehicle  
or the device that stores the data.  
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the  
OnStar® subscription service agreement or  
manual for information on its operations and  
data collection.  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made  
with the same materials and construction methods  
as the parts with which your vehicle was  
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are  
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s  
designed appearance, durability and safety are  
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help  
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.  
Recycled original equipment parts may also be  
used for repair. These parts are typically removed  
from vehicles that were total losses in prior  
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled  
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.  
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be  
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s  
originally designed appearance and safety  
performance, however, the history of these parts  
is not known. Such parts are not covered by  
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any  
related failures are not covered by that warranty.  
Insuring Your Vehicle  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.  
There are significant differences in the quality  
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy  
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced  
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting  
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These  
are made by companies other than GM and may  
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,  
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature  
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform  
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts  
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such  
parts are not covered by that warranty.  
compensation for damage repairs by using  
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance  
companies will not specify aftermarket collision  
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend  
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired  
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such  
insurance coverage is not available from your  
current insurance carrier, consider switching  
to another insurance carrier.  
Repair Facility  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company  
may require you to have insurance that assures  
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment  
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine  
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your  
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the  
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
GM also recommends that you choose a collision  
repair facility that meets your needs before you  
ever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer  
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained  
technicians and state of the art equipment, or  
be able to recommend a collision repair center  
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable  
equipment.  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where  
the towing service will be taking it. Get a  
card from the tow truck operator or write down  
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and  
the phone number.  
If an Accident Occurs  
Here is what to do if you are involved in an  
accident.  
Try to relax and then check to make sure you  
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure  
that no one else in your vehicle, or the  
other vehicle, is injured.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle  
before it is towed away. Make sure this  
includes your insurance information and  
registration if you keep these items in your  
vehicle.  
If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.  
Do not leave the scene of an accident until  
all matters have been taken care of. Move  
your vehicle only if its position puts you  
in danger or you are instructed to move it  
by a police officer.  
Gather the important information you will  
need from the other driver. Things like name,  
address, phone number, driver’s license  
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,  
model and model year, Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN), insurance company and  
policy number, and a general description of  
the damage to the other vehicle.  
Give only the necessary and requested  
information to police and other parties involved  
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal  
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything  
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard  
against post-accident legal action.  
If possible, call your insurance company from  
the scene of the accident. They will walk you  
through the information they will need. If they  
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police  
department headquarters the next day and you  
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.  
If you need roadside assistance, call  
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside  
Assistance Program on page 359 for more  
information.  
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In some states/provinces with “no fault”  
insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.  
This is especially true if there are no injuries  
and both vehicles are driveable.  
any required replacement collision parts be  
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM  
parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember,  
recycled parts will not be covered by your  
GM vehicle warranty.  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for  
your vehicle. Whether you select a Saturn  
retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix  
the damage, make sure you are comfortable  
with them. Remember, you will have to feel  
comfortable with their work for a long time.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you  
must live with the repair. Depending on your  
policy limits, your insurance company may initially  
value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss  
this with your repair professional, and insist  
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle  
is leased you may be obligated to have the  
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even  
if your insurance coverage does not pay the  
full cost.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully  
and make sure you understand what work will  
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a  
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable  
shops welcome this opportunity.  
If another party’s insurance company is paying  
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept  
a repair valuation based on that insurance  
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you  
have no contractual limits with that company.  
In such cases, you can have control of the repair  
and parts choices as long as cost stays within  
reasonable limits.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage  
Repair Process  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage  
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active  
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined  
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,  
or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the  
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at  
Reporting Safety Defects  
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);  
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
Administrator, NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street, SW.  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),  
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.  
Reporting Safety Defects to  
the Canadian Government  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may  
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety  
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may  
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,  
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual  
problems between you, your retailer or  
Saturn Corporation.  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that  
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should  
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition  
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.  
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:  
Transport Canada  
Road Safety Branch  
2780 Sheffield Road  
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport  
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly  
hope you’ll notify us.  
Service Manuals  
A variety of publications are available to you.  
Saturn service manuals are written for trained  
technicians, and in some cases, specialized  
tools and equipment are necessary to complete  
certain repairs. However, the manuals are  
available to owners who either have the training,  
or wish to gain a greater understanding of the  
technical aspect of their Saturn.  
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer  
Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000,  
or write:  
Saturn Corporation  
100 Saturn Parkway  
Mail Drop 371-999-S24  
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500  
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.  
Or, write to:  
For additional publications information or to  
order publications in the United States,  
call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.  
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are  
available by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.  
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain  
to the proper use and care of your vehicle.  
Some describe costly repairs. Others describe  
inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with  
the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.  
Owner Publications  
Information on how to obtain product bulletins  
and as described below is applicable only in  
the fifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia,  
and only for cars and light trucks with a  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less  
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of  
individual bulletins are also at your participating  
Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.  
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair  
a new or unexpected condition. Others describe  
a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help  
a technician service your vehicle better.  
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a  
small number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer  
or a qualified technician may have to determine  
if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.  
To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn  
Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit  
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.  
In Canada, information relating to product service  
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your  
Saturn retailer.  
Service Bulletins  
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service  
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors  
product performance in the field. We then prepare  
bulletins for servicing our products better. You  
can get these bulletins, too.  
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning (cont.)  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine (cont.)  
E
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
376  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light (cont.)  
378  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual .......... 94  
379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 131  
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................. 75  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 75  
Radios (cont.)  
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................ 93  
380  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................. 79  
381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 331  
PASS-Key® III+ .......................................... 75  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation .......................... 75  
382  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle (cont.)  
383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Quantum Instruments Power Supply Cascade Laser Starter Kit User Guide
Radio Shack Answering Machine 43 3801 User Guide
Radio Shack Telephone 43 3910 User Guide
Renesas Computer Hardware SH7147 User Guide
Ricoh Fax Machine FAX1180L User Guide
RIDGID Air Compressor OL90150 User Guide
Samsung Air Conditioner SH09ZW8 User Guide
Scag Power Equipment Lawn Mower SE 35BS User Guide
Sears Treadmill 21 7119 User Guide
Seiko Watch 7K32 User Guide